JP6713257B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachi-slot provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or a coin has been inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, “internal winning combination”). That is) and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the symbol combination relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of the privilege given to the player, a payout of a game medium (medal, etc.), a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be cited.

Further, conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above structure, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function has been developed. A game machine that terminates the AT when the total number of net additions (the number of payouts-the number of multiplications) of the game medium reaches a predetermined value (the number of terminations) is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-155664, A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the combination of symbols relating to the payout of the game medium is frequently stopped and displayed during AT, the total number of net additions of the game medium reaches a predetermined value with a small number of games. AT is reached, so AT ends promptly. On the other hand, as a game provided with the AT function, there is a game in which lottery is performed for each game in the AT or a specific period to obtain a privilege advantageous to the player.

As a lottery for obtaining a privilege that is advantageous to the player, for example, a lottery of “adding the number of acquisitions” that increases a predetermined value defined as the end number, or a “set to start the next AT after the end of the current AT” A lottery of "additional numbers" can be mentioned. Therefore, if the AT ends promptly, the chances of obtaining a privilege that is advantageous to the player, such as "addition of the acquired number" or "addition of the number of sets", will be reduced. For this reason, the player cannot obey the frequent payout of the game medium during AT.

The present invention has been made to meet the above-mentioned demand, and an object of the present invention is to frequently pay out game media during AT which ends when the total number of net additions of game media reaches a predetermined value. Also, it is to provide a game machine capable of preventing the interest of the game from being deteriorated.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

In addition, in order to solve the above problems, the present invention may provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.
Starting operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by Yu technique's (e.g., the start switch 16S below),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means,
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three later-described later, which is composed of a plurality of display rows, and which variably displays a symbol required for the game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R),
Stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S described later) for detecting a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol (for example, reel stop control processing described later),
Informing means for informing information for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means on the determination line across the plurality of display columns (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11 described later). )When,
Information game determination means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101 described below) capable of determining a transition to a notification game (for example, an AT game described below) in which the notification by the notification means is executed,
During the operation period of the notification game, when the predetermined internal winning combination (eg, "CT bell" described later) related to the payout of the game value is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the internal winning combination is determined to be the predetermined internal winning combination. net increase grant number of the game value corresponding (e.g., "difference number" below) and applying number counting means for counting the (e.g., S1214 of _ game start processing in aT shown in FIG. 152 described later),
The total number of net increase grant number of the game value counted by the grant number counting means (e.g., "net increase number" below) are terminated grant number of the game value defining the end trigger operational period of the notification game ( For example, when it becomes equal to or more than the “AT end payout number” described later), a notification game ending means for determining the end of the operation of the notification game (for example, during AT_game start time processing shown in FIG. 152 described later) S1215),
An information game number counting means (for example, an "AT game number counter" described later) for counting the number of games of the information game,
The information game determination means, when the total number of the net added number of sheets during the operation period of the information game is equal to or more than the end number of imparted games, the number of games counted by the information game number counting means is a prescribed number of games (for example, If it is less than the “specified number of games” to be described later), the shift to the notification game is determined (for example, S1217 and S1218 during AT_game start processing shown in FIG. 152 described later).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered even if the payout of the game medium occurs frequently during AT.

It is a figure for explaining the functional flow of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the whole circuit composition with which a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a general (RT0) game state internal lottery table (three sheets) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of an internal lottery table for 3MB between 2MB flags (RT1) game state in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 3MB flags (RT2) game state (3 pieces multiplication) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general (RT0) game states (two pieces hanging) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2MB flags (RT1) game state (2 pieces multiplication) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2MB (RT2) gaming state between 2MB in one embodiment of this invention (2 pieces multiplication). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2MB game states in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table for 3MB game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 3) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal winning combination storing area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the carryover combination storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a game state flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence table (in non-MB) between a winning combination and a stopping order in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a correspondence table between the abbreviations of internal winning combinations used in the control of the sub CPU and the abbreviations of internal winning combinations used in the control of the main CPU. It is a figure showing an example of a race runner MAP lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race information MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning target lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race win rate MAP lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race win rate MAP data table (percentage display) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the race result random determination table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race result random determination table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race result random determination table (the 3) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the after-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparation/during race) table in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB precursor lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle reduction lottery table (1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a cycle shortening lottery table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a direct-on-ride lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an AT start game number random determination (when Kappa wins) table (No. 1) in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an AT start game number random determination (when Kappa wins) table (No. 2) in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an AT start game number random determination (when Kappa wins) table (No. 3) in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an AT start game number random determination (when Kappa wins) table (Part 4) in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a Kappa sushi MAP data table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa game number acquisition lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1st dish) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (2nd dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (3rd dish) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (4th dish) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (fifth plate) table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a main flow chart which shows the example of processing of the main control circuit of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of MAXBET throwing processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of internal lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop initialization processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pull-in priority storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design code storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority attraction-in control processing in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of bonus end check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of bonus operation check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of interruption processing by control of the main CPU in one embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a mother task performed by a sub CPU in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the animation task performed by the sub CPU in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production contents decision processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing upon reception of an initialization command according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of race information lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving a start command according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a general medium_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB middle_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of AT preparatory_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of general end time_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB end_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of race end time_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the payout state update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB winning _Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB flag _Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB inside_Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of JAC_Bns state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of _Bns state setting processing in ChaBB in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of _Bns state setting processing in ChaJAC in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (1) at the time of the beginning of a general game in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (part 2) at the time of general middle_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pseudo BB lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the example of the processing in general BB_ game start in one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB rush judgment processing (at the time of game start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BBJAC shift judgment processing (at the time of game start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB counter management processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a race _ game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during AT preparations_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during AT_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during BB_game start during AT in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of general medium_game state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of general BB_game state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of race_game state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of AT preparing_game state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB_game state setting processing during AT in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during general BB_winning in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB entry judgment processing (at the time of winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BBJAC shift judgment processing (at the time of winning) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a general small and medium combination_win prize in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during race _ winning a prize in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during BB_ prize winning during AT in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of race_loss in modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the example of processing during race_game start in the modification 1. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table during race_miss in the modified example 2. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of MAXBET loading processing in modification 6; 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a number-of-sheets specification input process in modification 6; It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (in general, at the time of winning rate UP function selection) table in the modification 7. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB lottery table (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) in Modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle reduction lottery table in the modification 7 (at the time of winning rate UP function selection: the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle reduction lottery table (when the winning percentage UP function is selected: No. 2) in the modification 7. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table (when a winning rate UP function is selected) in Modification 7. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a directly-applied lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) in Modification 7. It is a flowchart showing an example of a general medium_game start time processing in Modification 7. It is a flowchart showing an example of a general medium_game start time processing in Modification 7. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning rate UP function selection process in Modification 7. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a lottery process when a general medium_winning rate UP function is selected in Modification 7. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during AT_game start in the modification 7. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of lottery processing during AT_winning rate UP function selection in Modification 7; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a directly-applied lottery table (AT-applied number) in Modification Example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa AT acquisition number lottery table in the modification 8. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of variable setting processing in modification 8; 21 is a flowchart showing an example of AT preparing_variable setting processing in Modification 8; 21 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during race_game start in modification example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of Kappa victory_game start in the modification 8. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during AT_game start in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BB_game start during AT in the modification 8. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production contents decision processing in modification 9. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of input state command reception processing in Modification 9. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during AT_game start in the modification 9. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of an AT-end payout number management process in modification 9; 23 is a flowchart showing an example of remaining AT game number management processing in Modification 9;

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot is taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as the game medium.

When a player inserts a medal into a pachi-slot and operates a start lever, one value (hereinafter, referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing function) included in the main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the activated line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonuses, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "miss". The related items are provided.

When the start lever is operated, the reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed. To do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In the pachi-slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is called the “number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece is set. The number is set to one pattern.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is normally on the activated line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to be displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means, for example, during the operation of the challenge bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “CB”) and the “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously activate the “CB” that is the second type special accessory, For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the symbol combination is displayed along the winning determination line as much as possible within a defined time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various prescribed times corresponding to the gaming state, and stops the rotation of the reel so that a combination of symbols which is not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line. Let

In this way, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed combination of symbols is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. In the pachi-slot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in the pachi-slot, in the flow of the series of game operations described above, display of images performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, output of light performed by various lamps, output of sound performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various performances are performed by using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for production (hereinafter, referred to as a random number value for production) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from the plurality of kinds of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in association with each trigger such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed) is a game. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the structure of the pachi-slot in the present embodiment will be described.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2, as shown in FIG. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both sides of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The grip 7 is a recess that can be carried by the carrier when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means) are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are also referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means) are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source and executes an effect by light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect by displaying an image.

A pedestal portion 12 is provided at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The frame member 13 has a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening of the frame member 13, and the stop button attachment portion 15 is provided below the opening of the frame member 13.

The symbol display area 4 is an area overlapping with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side) and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, 3R arranged behind it (on the side of the cabinet 2a) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

When the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 are stopped from rotating, the reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among the plurality of symbols provided on the circumferential surface of each reel. Two symbols are configured to be displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, in the frame of the reel display window 4, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle and lower regions for each reel (three symbols in total). ) Is displayed. In the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R, It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided in the lower portion of the reel display window 4 and is arranged so that the information display surface thereof faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and is not removable from the front surface side of the front door 2b.

Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 that faces the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. Then, a sheet member (information sheet) in which information about the game is written is arranged between the sheet placing portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as a mounting portion of the information sheet.

As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b, and has a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of the pachi-slot 1 via the. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, as described above, an example in which the information display window 14 is formed continuously with the reel display window 4 in the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is formed of a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button attachment portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is provided such that its substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (player side). On the substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15, three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R pass are provided side by side.

Three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are one of various devices to be operated by the player. In addition, below, stop button 19L, 19C, 19R is also called left stop button 19L, middle stop button 19C, and right stop button 19R, respectively.

In addition to the stop button, a medal slot 20, a MAX bet button 21, a 1-bet button 22, and a start lever 23 are provided on the base 12 as various devices to be operated by the player.

The medal insertion slot 20 is provided to receive medals that are dropped by the player from the outside onto the pachi-slot 1. The medals received from the medal slot 20 are used for one game with a preset number (for example, 3) as an upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is to be deposited inside the pachi-slot 1. You can That is, the pachi-slot 1 has a so-called credit function (game medium storing means).

The MAX bet button 21 and the 1 bet button 22 are provided to determine the number of coins to be used for one game from the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

Further, when viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as benefits (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). Display digitally. Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button that is pressed by the player when a selection operation such as playability is required. For example, when the player selects one of two types of AT start game number determination modes (modes) in the AT start game number determination game when "woman A" wins, which will be described later. The selection button 25 is connected to a sub-control board 72, which will be described later, and the sub-control board 72 detects the depression of the selection button 25 and controls the selection operation based on the detection.

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b. Each side panel unit has a light source, and executes an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12 of the front door 2b. The waist panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout opening 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides the medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output a sound effect or a sound such as music corresponding to the effect contents.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 and 4 are views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. On the upper side inside the cabinet 2a, for example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting a sound effect is provided.

A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on one side portion (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the cabinet-side speaker 42. The cabinet side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described below) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described below). 5) and a medal payout count switch (not shown).

An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the central portion inside the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), and the other side portion (right side in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the amplifier board 45 has an external portion described later. A centralized terminal board 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is provided. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

A hopper device 51 (medal payout device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in a lower portion inside the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout opening 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

The power supply device 53 has a power switch 53a and a power board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts the electric power of the AC voltage 100V into the electric power of the DC voltage required by each unit, and supplies the converted electric power to each unit.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) is attached to the front door 2b so as to be opened and closed from the back side. Has been.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main control board case 55 accommodating a main control board 71 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the middle door 41. Has been. Further, although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display means) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

In this embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b, as shown in FIG. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17, the information sheet in which the information regarding the game is written is arranged. This information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17 with the middle door 41 opened to expose the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17. It Also, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet exchange operation is performed after the middle door 41 is opened.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 constitute a main control board unit.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 described later (see FIG. 6 described later). The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot 1, such as determination of internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of winning or not. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

On the upper part of the middle door 41 of the front door 2b, a sub-control board case 57 that accommodates a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5, which will be described later) described later is arranged. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 has a sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7, which will be described later). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects such as display of images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the front door 2b is viewed from the rear surface side, a sub relay board 61 (described later, see FIG. 5) is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57. The sub relay board 61 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub control board 72 and a board provided around the sub control board 72. It should be noted that examples of the board arranged around the sub-control board 72 include LED boards 62A and 62B described later.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED boards 62A and 62B are provided above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. The LED boards 62A and 62B cause an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 5 described later), which will be described later, to emit light in accordance with an effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). Display a blinking pattern. The pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 described later is arranged below the sub relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 stores the history information of opening/closing of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

Below the middle door 41, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

Further, above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b, a selector 66 and a door open/close monitoring switch 67 (see FIG. 5 described later) are arranged. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are proper, and guides the proper medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detection means) for detecting the passage of a proper medal is provided on the path of the medal in the selector 66.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open/close monitor switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening/closing monitor switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening/closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened/closed by the middle door 41. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 described later). The various buttons and switches include, for example, a MAX bet button 21, a 1 bet button 22, a settlement button 27, a door opening/closing monitor switch 67, a BET switch 77, a start switch 79, etc., which will be described later.

<Control system of pachi-slot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal plate 74, a setting key type switch 56, a cabinet side relay substrate 44, and a power supply device 53 which are connected to the main control substrate 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 which are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal board 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, their explanations are omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

The power supply device 53 has a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1.

Further, the pachi-slot 1 has a door relay terminal plate 68, and a selector 66, a door opening/closing monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 (bet detecting means) connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. , A settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch substrate 80, a game operation display substrate 81, and a sub relay substrate 61. The selector 66, the door opening/closing monitor switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, and therefore their description is omitted here.

The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1 bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 is pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detection means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch substrate 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the reel that is rotating and a circuit for displaying the reel that can be stopped by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the 7-segment display 24, and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the 7-segment display 24. Further, the game operation display board 81 is connected to the LED 82, and the LED 82 lights up a mark for displaying a game start, a mark for performing a replay, or the like, for example, based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81.

The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot 1 has a sound I/O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 which are connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. The LED boards 62A, 62B and the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, and therefore their description is omitted here.

The sound I/O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown).

The pachi-slot 1 further includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control substrate case 57 together with the sub control substrate 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing image (video) for presentation, sound, light (LED group 85) and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one each time the pulse counter counts the output of the pulse a predetermined number of times required for the rotation of one symbol. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detector (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols are rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 101 mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and a performance registration task for extracting a random number for performance and determining and registering the content of the performance (effect data). Various programs for executing are included. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling the light output from the light source such as the LED group 85, and the speakers 65L, 65R. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of sound by the are also included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on/off light.

The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the decided effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

In addition, the sub CPU 102 causes a speaker group such as speakers 65L and 65R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the turning on and off of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<Transition flow of RT game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, various RT game states controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and transition flows thereof will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the RT gaming state, three types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT2 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other, are provided. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to replay is low, and the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state are both highly probable that the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to replay is high. It is a game state.

The RT0 game state is the RT game state set in the initial state, and the number of medals to be multiplied for each unit game is one, two or three. In the RT0 gaming state, the player is informed of information to instruct the player to double the number of medals (two coins are suggested).

Then, in the RT0 game state, when a middle bonus (special internal winning combination) of the below-mentioned name "2MB" that is internally won (established) only when playing two cards is won, the RT game state is shown as shown in FIG. Shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, when a middle bonus of the below-mentioned name "3MB" that is internally won (established) only when playing three cards is won, the RT gaming state changes from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state as shown in FIG. Move to the gaming state.

In the RT1 game state, the number of medals to be multiplied for each unit game is one, two, or three, but the player is informed of information to instruct the player to make three medals. (Three pieces are suggested), so a game of three pieces is mainly played. In this case, since the bonus of "2MB" won when the RT game state shifts to the RT1 game state is a bonus that is won only when the number of medals is two, in the RT1 game state, "2MB" The game is played with the bonus carried over. Therefore, in the following, the RT1 game state is also referred to as a "2MB flag state". Further, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, "2MB" will not be won even if "miss" is won internally. The control of the game operation in the state between the 2MB flags is performed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means (inter-flag game control means) for controlling the game operation in the 2MB inter-flag state (inter-flag state).

However, in the RT1 game state, when two games are played and the "2MB" bonus is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. In the "2MB" bonus game, a game of playing two coins is played, and when the number of paid-out medals exceeds two, the "2MB" bonus game ends. Then, when the bonus game of "2MB" is exhausted, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG.

In the RT2 game state, the number of medals to be multiplied for each unit game is 1, 2, or 3, but it is suggested that 3 medals will be played, so a game of 3 medals is mainly played.

In the RT2 game state, when three games are played and a "3MB" bonus is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. In the “3MB” bonus game, two games are played, and when the payout number of medals exceeds 30, the “3MB” bonus game ends. When the "3MB" bonus game is exhausted, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 game state, it is possible to carry out the game in a state where the bonus of “3MB” which is won when the RT game state is shifted to the RT2 game state is carried over. The RT2 game state is also referred to as a "3MB inter-flag state".

In this embodiment, in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) or the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), the total number of medals accumulated in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 3 (predetermined). If the number of coins is less than the maximum bet number), even if the player depresses the MAX bet button 21, a medal bet operation (insertion operation) cannot be performed. That is, in the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state, if the total number of medals accumulated in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 2 or less, the player pushes the MAX bet button 21. Even if it is pressed, the operation is invalid.

In the 2MB flag state, if the player's MAX bet operation is valid when the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals is two, a two-player game is executed and the carry-over is being carried over. There is a possibility of winning "2MB". In this case, since the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, as in the present embodiment, when the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals is 2 or less in the 2MB flag state, the player's MAX bet operation is invalidated, so that the player's MAX bet operation is disabled. It is possible to prevent the game state from shifting to a disadvantageous game state against the intention.

In the present embodiment, if the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals is less than 3 not only in the 2MB flag state and the 3MB flag state, but also in the general game state (RT0 game state). The player's MAX bet operation may be invalidated.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design placement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table, the position of each symbol in the respective rotation directions of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and data specifying the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 9) Refer to the symbol code table))))).

In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0" when the reel index is detected. Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the rotation direction of the reel (the direction from the symbol position "19" to the symbol position "0" in FIG. 9) with reference to the symbol position "0", the value of the symbol counter corresponds to " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as symbol positions.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, the reels are displayed in the upper area, middle area and lower area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of pattern that is present. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the symbol position “8” is set in each of the upper area, the middle area and the lower area of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “yellow BAR”, the symbol “watermelon 1” at the symbol position “7”, and the symbol “orange” at the symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a predetermined symbol combination (combination and combination name) according to the type of privilege (bonus, small win, replay), and the content (storage area, data) and payout of the corresponding display symbol. The correspondence with the number of sheets is specified.

In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the activated line (center line) matches the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the winning combination is won. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the prize has been won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus. If the symbol combination displayed along the activated line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, a so-called "miss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “miss” is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination of “miss” is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol combination table may be provided with an item of “miss” to directly define the symbol combination of “miss”.

Various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line. The "data" in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (contents of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

The data in the "storage area" of the display combination code column is data for designating a later-described symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30, which will be described later) in which data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 15 symbol code storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table indicates the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the symbol combination in which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of “payout number”, the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name “CT bell” is determined for the number of inserted medals, the symbol combination related to “CT bell” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. In the case of), 10 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination relating to the combination name “CT Lip” is determined (when the symbol combination relating to “CT Lip” is stopped and displayed on the activated line), the replay is activated. To do. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “3MB” or “2MB” (when the symbol combination related to “3MB” or “2MB” is stopped and displayed on the activated line) is determined. , MB (Middle Bonus) are activated.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, "0" is defined in the "3 sheets" column of "3MB", but no number is defined in the "2 sheets" column. .. In addition, "0" is defined in the "2 sheets" column of "2MB", but no number is defined in the "3 sheets" column. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination (display combination) of "3MB" is valid (winning) only when three cards are applied, and is invalid (missing) when two cards are applied. Further, the symbol combination (display combination) of "2MB" is valid (winning) only when two cards are applied, and is invalid (missing) when three cards are applied.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, an internal lottery table is provided separately for each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (2MB flag state), the RT2 gaming state (3MB flag state), and the MB gaming state. Further, in each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (2MB flag state) and the RT2 gaming state (3MB flag state), an internal lottery table is provided for each number of medals. In addition, as shown in the payout number column in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 10 to 12, in the present embodiment, all the numbers are not defined in the “single sheet” column. That is, in the game of one-sheet play, all the symbol combinations (display combination) described in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 10 to 12 are invalid (missed). Therefore, here, the description of the internal lottery table for the game at the time of "singing one" is omitted.

Each internal lottery table has a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value (winning probability) when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small winning combination/small winning combination) obtained when each winning number is determined. And a data pointer for replay and a data pointer for bonus). For convenience of explanation, the abbreviated name of the internal winning combination is also described in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15 and referred to when the number of medals is three. In addition, in the internal lottery table to be referred to when the number of medals is two and the internal lottery table to be referred to during the MB gaming state shown in FIGS. 16 to 20, in order to simplify the description, the internal winning combination The description of the name and data pointer is omitted.

The lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal lottery such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is defined as a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. And subtract sequentially. Next, a determination (internal lottery) is made as to whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction in the predetermined winning number becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), it means that the winning number (internal winning combination) has been won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the probability that the assigned data pointer is determined is higher as the winning number having a larger numerical value defined as the lottery value. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

(1) General (RT0) internal lottery table for gaming state (3 cards)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three sheets). This general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three cards) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied on a unit game is three in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 cards) defines the relation between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability) and the data pointer. To do.

For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is won. The probability of doing is “0”. On the other hand, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) game state (3 pieces) is referred to, the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") is won. The probability of doing is “17200/65536 (1/3.8)”. In this case, "0" is acquired as the small win/replay data pointer, and "2" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game is played with three cards in the normal game state (RT0 game state), only "3MB" is won as a bonus.

Further, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "normal lip 1" )) wins, the probability is “374/65536 (1/175.2)”. In this case, "1" is acquired as the small win/replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(2) Between 2MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game state (3 cards)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for the gaming state between 2MB flags (RT1) (three cards are stacked). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state (three cards) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied to the unit game is three in the two MB flag state (RT1 gaming state). Between 2MB flags (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (3 coins), the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability) and data pointer Stipulate.

For example, in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 gaming state), if the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flags (RT1) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is both “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game of three cards is played in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), neither the "2MB" bonus nor the "3MB" bonus is won.

Further, for example, in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flags (RT1) gaming state (3 cards multiplied) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability that the normal rip 1”) is won is “2048/65536 (1/32)”. In this case, "1" is acquired as the small win/replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 cards) shown in FIG. 13 and the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state inside shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those in the lottery table (3 cards), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 2MB flag state (RT1 gaming state) is higher than that in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state).

(3) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Game internal lottery table (3 cards)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for playing states between 3 MB flags (RT2) (three cards are multiplied). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (3 coins) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied to the unit game is 3 in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming condition). Between the 3MB flags (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (3 coins), the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability) and the data pointer. Stipulate.

For example, in the state between the 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 3MB flags (RT2) gaming state (three cards) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is both “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game of three cards is played in the 3MB inter-flag state (RT2 game state), neither the "2MB" bonus nor the "3MB" bonus is won.

Further, for example, in the state between 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 3MB flags (RT2) gaming state (three cards) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability that the normal rip 1”) is won is “500/65536 (1/131)”. In this case, "1" is acquired as the small win/replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" in the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 pieces) shown in FIG. 13 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state inside shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the lottery table (3 cards), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB inter-flag state (RT2 gaming state) is higher than that in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). In addition, the winning probability of the winning numbers “4” to “16” of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state (3 cards) shown in FIG. 14 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the internal lottery table (for 3 cards), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB inter-flag state (RT2 gaming state) is lower than that in the 2MB inter-flag state (RT1 gaming state). Become.

(4) General (RT0) internal lottery table for game state (2 pieces)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two pieces). This general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two cards) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied on a unit game is two in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two coins) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). The internal winning combination with the name “2 bells” in FIG. 16 corresponds to all small winning combinations.

For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when referring to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (two pieces), the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is won. The probability of doing is “26000/65536 (1/2.52)”. On the other hand, in the general game state (RT0 game state), if the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) game state (two pieces) is referred to, the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") is won. The probability of doing is “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a two-player game is played in the normal game state (RT0 game state), only "2MB" is won as a bonus.

Further, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (two pieces) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "normal lip 1" )) wins the winning probability is “8978/65536 (1/7.3)”.

(5) Between 2MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game state (2 cards)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for the gaming state between the 2 MB flags (RT1) (two cards are stacked). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state (2 coins hanging) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied to the unit game is 2 in the 2MB flag (RT1 gaming condition). Between the 2MB flags (RT1) game state internal lottery table (multiplied by two) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). .. Note that, for example, the name “2MB+2 bells” in FIG. 17 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name “2bells” (all small winning combinations) is won while the “2MB” is carried over.

For example, in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flags (RT1) gaming state (two cards) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is both “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when playing a game with two cards in the 2MB flag state (RT1 gaming state), neither the "2MB" bonus nor the "3MB" bonus is won.

Further, for example, in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 gaming state), if the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flags (RT1) gaming state (two cards) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability of winning 2MB+normal lip 1”) is “32978/65536 (1/1.99)”.

In addition, the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 cards) shown in FIG. 16 and the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from a comparison with that of the one-player game, even in the two-player game, the winning probability of the replay combination in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) is higher than that of the general game state (RT0 game state). Become.

(6) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for game state (2 cards)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of the internal lottery table for the gaming state between the 3 MB flags (RT2) (multiplying two tables). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (2 coins hanging) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied on the unit game is 2 in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming condition). Between the 3MB flags (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (2 pieces) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). .. Note that, for example, the name "3MB+2 sheets bell" in FIG. 18 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name "2 sheets bell" (all small winning combinations) is won while the "3MB" is carried over.

For example, in the 3MB inter-flag state (RT2 gaming state), if the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 3MB inter-flag (RT2) gaming state (two cards) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is both “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when playing a game of playing two cards in the 3MB inter-flag state (RT2 gaming state), both "2MB" and "3MB" bonuses are not won.

Further, for example, in the state between the 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (two cards is multiplied) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability of winning 3MB+normal lip 1”) is “8980/65536 (1/7.3)”.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two pieces) shown in FIG. 16 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with that of the one-player game, even in the game of two-player game, the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is higher than that in the general game state (RT0 game state). Become. In addition, the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state (multiplied by 2) shown in FIG. 17 and the internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with that of (two cards), even in a game of two cards, the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is 2MB flag state (RT1 game state). It will be lower than that.

(7) Internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state. This 2MB gaming state internal lottery table is referred to when the middle bonus "2MB" is operating (when the gaming state is the 2MB gaming state). The internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” and “2” and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the 2MB gaming state, the internal winning combination of the name “CB winning combination” is always won. The internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” corresponds to all small winning combinations.

(8) Internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state. The internal lottery table for the 3MB gaming state is referred to when the middle bonus “3MB” is operating (when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state). The internal lottery table for the 3MB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” and “2” and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state, the internal winning combination of the name “CB winning combination” is always won.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the activated line (center line). That is, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the activated line, that is, the type of display combination that can be won is uniquely determined. The black circles in each symbol combination determination table indicate symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the activated line (center line) in the winning symbol combination.

For example, when the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1”, the names “CT lip”, “CU lip”, “Bell lip 1” to “Bell lip 8”, “BTBAR 1” to “BTBAR 6”, “CTSVN 1”, The symbol combination of "CTSVN2", "CDSVN2" and "CDSVN3" can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "213 bell 1", the symbol combination of the name "CT bell" and "control combination 1" to "control combination 10" can be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, for example, when the internal winning combination is the combination of the name “CB combination”, the symbol combinations of all the small combinations can be stopped and displayed.

In the symbol combination determination table, the case where the "internal winning combination" becomes "miss" is not specified, but this is all symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 10 to 12. Indicates that the display of combinations is not allowed.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. Although not described here (not shown), storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used for various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Internal winning combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the internal winning combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the internal winning combination storing areas are composed of the internal winning combination storing areas 0 to 7 each represented by 1-byte data.

In each of the internal winning combination storing areas 0 to 7, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has been internally won. In the internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 24, although the storage areas corresponding to the internal winning combinations with the names “2 bells” and “CB winning combinations” are not defined, when these internal winning combinations are won. "1" is stored in the storage area (bit) of all internal winning combinations related to the small winning combination.

[Display combination storage area]
Next, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storing areas are composed of the display combination storing areas 0 to 7 each represented by 1-byte data.

In each of the display combination storing areas 0 to 7, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the activated line. ..

[Carryover storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the carryover combination storing area will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal carryover combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when either “2MB” or “3MB” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carryover combination storing area as the internal carryover combination. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storing area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storing area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storing area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus game or the RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area, the operation of the middle bonus "2MB" is performed, which indicates that the game state is the 2MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 19L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 19L is a stop button which has not been pressed yet, that is, a valid stop button, "1" is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes the stop button pressed this time and the stop button not pressed yet based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area is configured by a 1-byte data storage area and stores a pressing order flag of 1 byte.

In the press order flag, the type of the stop button press order is assigned to each bit. For example, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area is composed of symbol code storage areas 0 to 14 each represented by 1-byte data.

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the display combination (symbol combination) that can be stopped on the activated line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 0-14.

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order>
Next, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the reel stop order will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a table showing a correspondence relationship between internal winning combinations in non-bonus (non-MB) and stop order, and shows types of display winning combinations corresponding to combinations of internal winning combinations and reel stop order. In order to simplify the description, FIG. 31 shows only internal winning combinations in which the role of the internal winning combination with respect to the game is different depending on the pressing order.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "213 bell 1", the symbol combination of the name (combination name) "CT bell" and "control combination 1" to "control combination 10" can be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 31), the symbol combination related to the combination name “CT bell” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, the reels are "left center right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 31), "left right center" (stop order "132" in FIG. 31), "center right left" (stop order "231 in FIG. 31". ”), “middle right and left” (stop order “312” in FIG. 31) or “middle right and left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 31), the combination names “control role 1” to Any symbol combination of "control combination 10" is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "231 bell 5", the combination name "CT bell", "control combination 1" to "control combination 8", "control combination 17" and "control combination 19" symbol combination Can be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 31), the symbol combination related to the combination name “CT bell” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 31), "right and left middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 31), "center left and right" (stop order "213 in FIG. 31". ”), “middle right and left” (stop order “312” in FIG. 31) or “middle right and left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 31), the combination names “control role 1” to One of the symbol combinations of "control combination 8", "control combination 17", and "control combination 19" is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "3xx3 bells", the combination name "CD bell", "control combination 1" to "control combination 4", "control combination 9" to "control combination 24" Can be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle right and left” (stop order “312” in FIG. 31) or “middle right and left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 31), the combination name is changed to “CD bell”. The symbol combination concerned is stopped and displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 31), "right and left middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 31), "center left and right" (stop order "213 in FIG. 31". )) or “middle right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 31), the combination names “control combination 1” to “control combination 4” and “control combination 9” to “control combination 24” are displayed. One of the symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

<Various sub game states>
Next, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, various sub game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) in a 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the sub game state in the state between the 2MB flag, a state mainly called "non-AT state", "AT preparation state", "AT state" and "pseudo BB (big bonus) state" is provided. To be The game of "pseudo BB state" is executed as an interrupt process when the pseudo BB lottery performed in the "non-AT state", "AT preparation state" and "AT state" is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, as a sub game state in the state between the 2MB flags, a state called "W chance state" that can be shifted from "AT state", "AT state", or "AT state" or " There is also provided a state referred to as an "additional challenge state" which can be shifted from the "pseudo BB state". The contents of each sub game state will be specifically described below.

As will be described below, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined privilege (shortening the cycle in the non-AT state or adding the number of AT games) in the "miss" win in various sub game states in the state between the 2MB flags. ) Is provided. The privilege granting function is controlled by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (privilege grant determination unit) that determines whether or not to grant a predetermined privilege at the time of “miss” winning.

[Non-AT state]
The non-AT state is composed of a "normal state" and a "transition effect state" to the AT state. Then, in the non-AT state, basically, the game in the normal state and the game in the transition effect state are periodically repeated with a predetermined number of unit games (190 games in this embodiment).

Specifically, in the one-cycle game in the non-AT state, first, the game in the normal state (hereinafter, referred to as “normal game”) in which the number of games in one set is 180 games (the first number of unit games) is performed. Be seen. Next, after the normal game is digested, the game in the transition effect state (hereinafter, referred to as "transition effect game") is played over a period of 10 games.

Then, AT lottery is performed at the start of the transition effect game, and if the lottery result is AT winning, the effect corresponding to the AT winning is performed during the period of the transition effect game, and then the sub game state is the AT preparation state. Move to. On the other hand, if the result of the AT lottery is AT non-win, an effect corresponding to AT non-win is performed during the transition effect game, and then the next set of normal games (next-cycle non-AT state games) Be started.

As described above, when the result of the AT lottery in the transition effect game is non-win, the normal game and the transition effect game are periodically repeated with a predetermined number of games (190 games). Then, in the periodic game digestion process, basically, after the digestion of the normal game (after digestion of 180 games), the chance of shifting to the AT state is always given. That is, in the non-AT state, the chances of shifting to the AT state are periodically given. Hereinafter, the contents of the normal game and the transition effect game will be described in more detail.

(1) Normal Game In the normal game, the winning/non-winning lottery of the game in the pseudo BB state (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo BB game”) based on the internal winning combination for each game (each unit game) "Pseudo BB lottery") is performed.

Then, in the normal game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. In addition, during the period of the pseudo BB game, the number of games of the normal game is not counted (subtracted). Then, when the pseudo BB game is digested, the sub game state returns to the normal state. At this time, the normal game is restarted from the state before the start of the pseudo BB game.

In addition, in the normal game, a “miss” or a specific internal winning combination (in the present embodiment, one of “normal lip”, “weak Che”, “strong Che” and “rare winning”) is internally won once. In the case or in the case of continuous winning, a subtraction lottery for the number of remaining games in the current game of the current set, that is, a lottery for shortening the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle (hereinafter referred to as “cycle shortening lottery”) is performed. Therefore, if the cycle reduction lottery is won in the normal game, the period until the transition effect game is started is shortened in the game period in the non-AT state of the current period. That is, the period until the game starts in the AT state may become shorter.

In the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games of the current game of the normal game is equal to or more than a predetermined number of games (predetermined unit game number: 10 games in the present embodiment), the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game. For, the number of winning shortened games is subtracted from the number of remaining games in the current game of the current set. At this time, if the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games) (the subtraction result may be a negative value in some cases), the absolute value of the subtraction result game number is the surplus shortening game in the current set. It is stocked as a number (surplus unit game number). On the other hand, in the case where the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game during the period when the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games), the number of the shortened games won is the number of surplus shortened games. Stocked as.

For example, when the predetermined number of games is 10, the number of remaining games in the current game of the normal game is 30, and the number of winning shortened games is 50, the subtraction result is -20 games. Therefore, the number of games stocked as the surplus shortened games is 20 games. At this time, the reference of the number of shortened games to be stocked as a surplus is set to a predetermined number of games (10 games), and the difference between the value of the predetermined number of games (10) and the value of the subtraction result (-20) is dealt with. The number of games played (30 games) may be the number of surplus shortened games. In addition, for example, when the predetermined number of games is 10, the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set is 5, and the number of winning shortened games is 50, the number of surplus shortened games is calculated. The number of games to be stocked is 50 games.

Then, the stocked surplus shortened number of games is applied at the start of the game in the non-AT state of the next cycle, that is, at the start of the normal game of the next set, at which point the normal period (non-AT state) game period Is shortened. In this case, in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle, the period until the transition effect game is started becomes shorter. That is, when the number of short games for surplus is generated as a result of the lottery for shortening the cycle, the period until the start of the game in the AT state may be shortened even in the next cycle. Also, for example, depending on the number of shortened games (the number of stocked shortened games) obtained by the cycle shortening lottery, the transition effect game may be started from the beginning in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle.

(2) Transition production state In the transition production game, a specific number of games (third unit game number: book) in which the production (notification) game showing the result (win/non-win) of the AT lottery performed at the start of the game period In the embodiment, 10 games are played. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, an effect (race effect) in which a plurality of ally characters and an enemy character race in the transition effect game is performed as an effect indicating the result of the AT lottery. The race effect is mainly performed by displaying the race video on the liquid crystal display device 11. Here, the content of the race effect (transition effect to the AT state) performed in the transition effect game will be described more specifically.

Specifically, first, at the start of the race effect (transition effect game), a lottery (race result lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined ally character previously set as a race victory target (candidate) wins the race. To do. Then, in this race result lottery, if the race victory of the predetermined teammate character is won, it is AT win, and if the race victory of the predetermined teammate character is non-win, it is AT non-win.

In addition, at the start of the race effect (transition effect game), a plurality of teammate characters including a predetermined teammate character set as a race victory target (candidate) and an enemy character are liquid crystal display devices as members participating in the race. 11 is displayed. Then, in the subsequent game period of the race effect, when the AT wins, a video effect in which a predetermined ally character wins the race is performed by the liquid crystal display device 11, and when the AT wins, the enemy character wins the race. This is performed by the liquid crystal display device 11.

Therefore, as a result of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, when a predetermined ally character wins, the sub game state shifts from the transition effect state to the AT preparation state, and if the enemy character wins, the next set ( The normal game of the next cycle) (game in the non-AT state) is started. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the number of basic stay games in the AT state performed thereafter changes according to the type of teammate character who has won the race. This point will be described later in detail.

Further, in this embodiment, six types of "male A", "male B", "female A", "kappa", "tengu", and "male A/male B" are provided as ally characters. In addition, the information about the type of teammate character who is the candidate (candidate) to win the race in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production related to the race win rate of the teammate character is applied to the game in the non-AT state of the current cycle. If the information regarding the content of the race effect is not set (when the race starter MAP described later is not set (initial state) or the race information MAP data described later is “0”), the current cycle It is determined by lottery at the start of the game in the AT state (at the start of the game period of the normal game). At this time, in the present embodiment, not only information on the content of the race effect of the current set (first race) but also information on the content of the race effect up to the fourth set destination (fifth game) is determined.

Further, in the transition effect game, a pseudo BB lottery is performed based on each game and an internal winning combination. Then, in the transition effect game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and when the pseudo BB game is digested, the sub game state is shifted to the AT preparation state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied in the game period of the transition effect state (during the race effect period) (when the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation”: described later). 111), a lottery is carried out in addition to the number of AT games, and if the lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games is acquired.

The above-mentioned operation control of the normal game and the transition effect game is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (normal game control means and transition effect game control means) for controlling the operations of the normal game and the transition effect game.

[AT ready state]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub game state shifts from the transition effect state to the AT state, the sub game state shifts to the AT state via the AT preparation state. In the AT preparation state, a game (hereinafter referred to as "AT start game number determination game") for determining the number of basic stay games in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as "AT start game number") is mainly performed. In the AT start game number determination game (notification game number determination game), pseudo BB lottery is performed for each game based on the internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, the AT start game number (basic unit game number) is the type of the teammate character who has won the race effect of the transition effect game (“male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “kappa”, "Tengu" or "Male A/Male B"). Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When "Man A" wins
When "Man A" wins the race production, the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game is used as a chance to randomly draw the AT start game number based on the internal winning combination, and the predetermined number is determined. The number of AT start games (50 to 300 games) is determined.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the AT start game number determination game may not be determined in the start game of the AT start game number determination game when the "male A" wins. In this case, the AT start game number determination game is continued, When the lever of the next game is operated, the number of AT start games is randomly determined again. At this time, the number of continuations of the AT start game number determination game (once or twice in the present embodiment) changes according to the internal winning combination determined in the start game of the AT start game number determination game. Then, in the AT start game number determination game when the "male A" wins, the lottery table (not shown) of the AT start game number is appropriately set so that the AT start game number to be acquired increases as the number of continuations increases. ing.

(2) When "Man B" wins When "Man B" wins in the race production, the number of AT start games is randomly determined by lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game. Then, the predetermined number of AT start games (50 games to 300 games) is determined. In the AT start game number determination game when "Man B" wins, the AT start game number is determined in one game. The lottery value of the number of AT starting games used in the lottery for determining the number of AT starting games when "Man B" wins is the same regardless of the internal winning combination.

(3) When "Woman A" Wins When "Woman A" wins in the race production, the number of AT start games is determined by repeatedly hitting the MAX bet button 21. In the AT start game number determination game at the time of "woman A" victory in this embodiment, two types of AT start game number determination modes (determination modes) are prepared.

Specifically, a first mode in which the number of AT start games is increased by 50 games by one MAX bet operation, and a second mode in which the number of AT start games is added by five games by one MAX bet operation Is prepared. In both modes, continuous lottery of the addition process of the AT start game number is performed for each MAX bet operation, the continuation probability is 50% in the first mode, and the continuation probability is 95% in the second mode. Become. This AT start game number determination mode (determination mode) is selected by the player at the start of the AT start game number determination game (game in AT preparation state).

In the AT start game number determination game when "woman A" wins, first, at the end of the next game after the "woman A" victory is notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 (after all reels are stopped), the AT start game The liquid crystal display device 11 displays information indicating that the selection operation of the number determination mode (determination mode) is performed. Then, the player operates the selection button 25 to select one of the first mode and the second mode as the AT start game number determination mode. Next, when the lever operation of the next game of the game in which the selection operation of the AT start game number determination mode is performed is performed, the AT start game number determination mode (first mode or second mode) selected by the player is performed. Mode) is confirmed (determined). Then, in the game in which the operation for determining the AT start game number determination mode is performed, after the reels are completely stopped, the AT start game number addition processing is performed by the continuous beating operation of the MAX bet button 21. That is, the AT start game number determination game at the time of "woman A" victory is played over two games after the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies the "woman A" victory.

Then, in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins, a predetermined MAX bet operation is performed until the continuous lottery result of the addition process of the AT start game number performed for each MAX bet operation becomes non-win. The number of AT games (50 games or 5 games) is added to the number of AT start games. Note that the AT start game number is added only when the MAX bet operation is performed when the continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process is won. Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins, the first mode is selected and the result of continuous lottery of the addition process of the AT start game number in the sixth MAX bet operation. If is not won, the number of AT start games is 250 games.

In the case where the first mode is selected and the result of the continuous lottery of the addition process of the AT start game number is non-win in the first MAX bet operation, the AT start game number becomes 50 games. Is set. That is, when the first mode is selected, the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed. In addition, when the second mode is selected, the number of games to be added for each MAX bet operation is small, so that MAX bet operations for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 games) are guaranteed.

(4) When "Tengu" wins When "Tengu" wins the race production, the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game is used as a trigger when the "Man B" wins. The number of AT start games is randomly determined, and a predetermined number of AT start games is determined. Also in this case, the number of AT start games is determined in one game.

However, in the AT start game number determination game when the "Tengu" wins, unlike the "man B" victory (the AT start game number of 50 games or more is determined), the AT start game number of 100 games or more is determined.

(5) When "Kappa" wins If "Kappa" wins in the race production, in the AT start game number determination game, the video production in which "Kappa" eats sushi (hereinafter referred to as "Kappa Sushi production") It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 over a plurality of games. In this Kappa sushi production, the AT start game count is added every time "Kappa" eats sushi, and the added game count (additional unit game count) is added to the sushi story (game information) that the "Kappa" eats. Will change accordingly.

In this embodiment, the types of sushi items eaten by "Kappa" are "squid", "egg", "kappa maki", "salmon", "squid", "tuna", "sea urchin", and "ise shrimp". 8 types are prepared. Then, the higher the sushi material, the more the number of addition games is set.

Here, the content of the AT start game number determination game (Kappa sushi production) when "Kappa" is won will be described more specifically. First, when the AT start game number determination game is started, the appearance patterns of the sushi items from the first game to the tenth game (first plate to 10th plate) are determined by lottery, and the determined first plate Sushi items up to the 10th plate are sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

After that, the effect of eating or not eating the sushi sushi that "Kappa" is sequentially output is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 for each game, and when the effect of "Kappa" eating sushi is executed, The number of additional games is acquired. For example, as shown in a kappa game number acquisition lottery table of FIG. 55 described later, when “kappa” eats sushi “squid”, 10 or 300 games are added to the AT start game number depending on the lottery result. Is obtained as. Further, for example, when the "Kappa" eats the sushi story "Ise shrimp", 100, 150, 200 or 300 games are acquired as the number of additional games according to the lottery result. Then, the total number of additional games corresponding to all the sushi items eaten by "Kappa" by the time the AT start game number determination game ends is set as the AT start game number.

In the above Kappa sushi production, whether or not to eat the sushi material for which "Kappa" is given is determined based on the type of the internal winning combination. Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a “group 1 combination” described later (for example, “213 bell 1” to “213 bell 8”, etc.), “Kappa” eats sushi material and "Kappa" does not eat sushi in the case of internal winning. That is, in the period of the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins, the AT start game number is added for each game in which the internal winning combination is the "group 1 role" described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time "Kappa" eats sushi material in the Kappa sushi production, the sushi material displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 decreases. However, when the sushi ingredients to be delivered to the fifth game (sixth dish) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, when the sushi ingredients for the sixth game (sixth dish) and thereafter are not determined, At this point, the sushi items after the sixth game (sixth plate) are randomly determined.

Also, the timing for ending the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" is won is managed by the "Kappa end counter", and the value (end parameter) of the kappa end counter becomes less than "0" (predetermined condition). In this case, the AT start game number determination game upon winning the "Kappa" is completed. In this embodiment, the initial value of the kappa end counter is set to "5".

The value of the Kappa end counter is decremented by "1" when "Kappa" eats a specific sushi item (sushi item with wasabi), specifically "squid", "salmon" or "tuna". To be done. That is, in the current game, the data of any sushi item such as "squid", "salmon" and "tuna" is set as the sushi item to be eaten by "Kappa", and the internal winning combination is described in "Group" below. In the case of "1 role", the number of additional games corresponding to the sushi story is acquired, but the value of the kappa end counter is decremented by "1".

Further, in the present embodiment, when “Kappa” has eaten a predetermined sushi item, specifically “Kappa Maki”, the value of the kappa end counter is incremented by “1”. However, in this case, the number of additional games is not acquired. That is, in the current game, when the data of the sushi item of "Kappa Maki" is set as the sushi item of the "Kappa" and the internal winning combination is the "Group 1 role" described later, the addition is made. Although the number of games cannot be obtained, the value of the kappa end counter is incremented by "1", and the period of the AT start game number determination game is extended.

In the present embodiment, in the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" is won, the internal winning combination is a specific combination other than the "Group 1 combination" described later ("Missing", "Reach eye lip", "Weak"). “Che”, “Strong Che”, “Watermelon”, “Chance A”, “Chance B”, and “Definite Winner”), 5 games (2nd to 6th) from the next game. A lottery (data conversion occurrence lottery) as to whether or not the data conversion of the sushi material is performed is performed (see FIG. 56 described later). When the data conversion occurrence lottery of this sushi item is won, in the present embodiment, the number of additional games associated with the sushi item after conversion is equal to or greater than the number of additional games associated with the sushi item before conversion. The data of the sushi item is converted into the value (see FIGS. 57 to 61 described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the value of the kappa end counter becomes less than "0" in the AT start game number determination game when the "kappa" is won, the player repeatedly hits the MAX bet button 21, A lottery of revival of the game for deciding the number of AT start games when "Kappa" is won is performed. Specifically, the rehabilitation lottery is performed by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 20 times. At this time, since the recovery lottery is performed every time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed, the recovery lottery is performed 20 times. Then, when the revival lottery is won by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21, the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" is started again, and the AT start game number can be further increased.

(6) When "Men A/Men B" wins When the "Men A/Men B" wins the race, in the AT start game number determination game, first, as the number of games to be added to the AT start game number in the first game 10 games will be won. Then, thereafter, the number of additional games that can be acquired for each game (every continuation) is increased by “10” until the tenth game. That is, in the first game, the second game, the third game,..., The ninth game, and the tenth game, the acquirable additional game numbers are 10, 20, 30,. Furthermore, the number of additional games that can be acquired in the eleventh game and thereafter is 100 games per game.

Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "man A/man B", if the game is continued up to the tenth game, 550 games are acquired as the AT start game number. Further, when the games are continued after the eleventh game, the AT start game number is increased by 100 games per game (AT start game number becomes 650 games, 750 games,... ).

In addition, the continuation probability for each game of the AT start game number determination game when the "male A/male B" wins is 80%, and when this continuous lottery is unwinned, the "male A/male B" wins At this time, the AT start game number determination game ends.

Further, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "male A/male B" of the present embodiment, continuation confirmation up to the second game is guaranteed. However, if continuous lottery is not won in the second game, the number of AT starting games is 30, but in this case, the number of AT starting games is set to 50 games. That is, in the AT start game number determination game when the "man A/man B" wins, the acquisition of the AT start game number of 50 games is guaranteed at a minimum.

As described above, in this embodiment, the number of AT start games that can be acquired when "Tengu", "Kappa", or "Male A/Male B" wins in the race production of the transition production game is "Male A". , "Male B" or "female A" is set to be greater than that when winning. Therefore, if the starting members displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at the start of the race production of the transition production game include "Tengu", "Kappa" or "Man A/Man B", more AT starts. Players can be expected to win the number of games.

The operation control of the various AT start game number determination games described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (notification number determination game control unit) for controlling the operation of the AT start game number determination game.

[AT state]
When the AT start game number is determined in the AT preparation state game (AT start game number determination game) and the AT preparation state game ends, a specific game number (second unit game number: AT start game number+additional AT game) The game in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as “AT game”) is started in which the pushing order of the small winning combination is notified for a number of times.

In the AT game (notification game), a pseudo BB lottery is performed based on each game and an internal winning combination, and when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and the pseudo BB game is digested. Then, the sub game state returns to the AT state. At this time, the number of AT games (AT game number) is not counted (subtracted) during the interruption period of the pseudo BB game.

In addition, in the AT game, additional lottery is performed based on each game, the type of internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the AT game, if the "miss", "reach eye lip" or "rare part" is internally won once, or if the "miss" or "normal lip" is consecutively won. In this case, the lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed. When the additional lottery for the AT game number is won, the additional AT game number (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the currently remaining AT game number (remaining AT game number).

Further, in the AT game, a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR") is on the effective line. When it is stopped and displayed, the sub game state shifts to the "W chance state". Then, after the game in the "W chance state" has been digested, the AT game is restarted. Note that the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the "W chance state" game period.

In the "W chance state", a game is played in which an increase in payout of medals can be expected. In the "W chance state" game, the ending condition is not the number of exhausting games but a specific small win (in this embodiment, "CT bell" capable of paying out 10 medals) is internally won. It is defined by the number of times the stop button is pressed in order of navigation (hereinafter referred to as "Bell navigation frequency"). That is, in the game in the "W chance state", the ending condition is managed by the number of times of the Bell navigation, and when the number of times of the Bell navigation reaches a predetermined number, the game in the "W chance state" is ended. In the present embodiment, the number of bell navigations in the "W chance state" game is set to 5.

Furthermore, in the AT game, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (in the present embodiment, on the center line (effective line) or on the cross-up, "yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR"- When "yellow BAR" are gathered), the sub game state shifts to "additional challenge state". Then, after the game in the "additional challenge state" has been digested, the AT game is restarted.

In the "additional challenge state" game, the pseudo BB game is highly likely to be won and stocked over a predetermined number of games. Further, the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the play period of the "additional challenge state".

Further, when the AT game is finished, the sub game state is always shifted to the transition effect state, and the above-described transition effect game (race effect) is performed. In this case, information regarding the type of teammate character who is a candidate to win the race (candidate) in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production related to the race win rate of the teammate character at the start of the game in the AT state before the transition. It is determined by lottery.

The above-mentioned AT game operation control is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (assist time game control means) for controlling the operation of the AT game.

[Pseudo BB state]
In the pseudo BB game (special game), a specific replay combination (whether it is "normal rep 1" to "normal rep 8") is won, and the pressing order of the stop button is associated with the winning replay combination. In the case where the predetermined pressing order is given (when the pressing order is correct), a game called "JACGAME" (specific game) in which an increase in medal payout can be expected is executed.

In the "JAC GAME" game, the end condition is not the number of exhausting games, but a stop button performed when a specific small win ("CT bell" capable of paying out 10 medals in this embodiment) is internally won. It is regulated by the number of times of pressing order navigation (number of times of Bell navigation). That is, in the “JAC GAME” game, the ending condition is managed by the number of times of Bell navigation, and when the number of times of Bell navigation reaches a specific number, the game of “JAC GAME” ends. In the present embodiment, the specific number of bell navigations in “JAC GAME” is set to 5.

Further, the game period in the pseudo BB state is divided into a period called "JACGAME guaranteed period" and a period called "JACIN challenge period" performed thereafter.

The “JACGAME guaranteed section” is a game period (the period is indefinite) in which the game always continues until “JACGAME” is exhausted a predetermined number of times (twice in the present embodiment). Then, in the "JACGAME guaranteed section", when a specific replay combination (whether one of "normal rep 1" to "normal rep 8") is won, the stop button associated with the winning replay combination is pressed. The pressing order is notified (navigation), and execution of "JACGAME" is guaranteed.

The game form of the "JAC GAME guaranteed section" is the same regardless of the transition route from the sub game state to the pseudo BB state. That is, even when the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, or when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, the game form of the "JAC GAME guaranteed section" is the same. On the other hand, the game form of the "JACIN challenge section" differs depending on the transition route from the sub game state to the pseudo BB state.

In the game of the "JACIN challenge section" when the sub game state is changed from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay combination (in a specific number of games (specific unit number of games: 10 games in this embodiment)) In the game in which "normal rep 1" to "normal rep 8" are won, a two-choice challenge effect in which the stop buttons are pressed is performed. When the correct answer is given to the two-choice challenge effect, "JACGAME" is executed as an interrupt process (interrupt game).

On the other hand, in the game of the "JACIN challenge section" when the sub game state is changed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay combination ("normal replay part" is performed during a specific number of games (10 games in this embodiment). In a game in which any of "1" to "normal rep 8" is won, the pressing order of the stop buttons associated with the winning replay combination is informed (navigated) without fail. That is, when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, "JACGAME" is always executed as an interrupt process if a specific replay combination is won in the "JACIN challenge section". Therefore, in this case, it is possible to obtain more medals than in the case where the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state.

In the pseudo BB game when the sub game state is changed from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, the cycle of the non-AT state game period is based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. Short lottery will be held. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, if the “miss”, the “reach eye lip” or the “rare role” is internally won once, or When “Loss” or “Normal Lip” is won in succession, the cycle reduction lottery is performed. If the cycle shortening lottery is won, a predetermined number of shortened games (0 to 170 games) corresponding to the winning result is subtracted from the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that the benefit of shortening the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle can be obtained.

Furthermore, if the result of subtracting the number of shortened games from the current number of remaining games in the normal game is less than “0”, the number of games of the absolute value of the subtraction result is It is stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus in the current set. Then, the stocked surplus shortened number of games is applied at the time of starting the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period in the non-AT state (normal state) is shortened.

On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state is changed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. .. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, if the “miss”, the “reach eye lip”, or the “rare hand” is internally won once, or “ When “Loss” or “Normal Lip” is won in succession, the lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed. If the additional lottery is won, a predetermined additional AT game number (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the current remaining AT game number. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that a benefit of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

The operation control of the pseudo BB game and the "JAC GAME" described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (special game control means and specific game control means) for controlling the operation of the pseudo BB game and "JACGAME".

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described. The correspondence between the abbreviated name of the internal winning combination used in various processes controlled by the sub CPU 102 and the various tables managed below, and the name and abbreviation of the above-mentioned internal winning combination managed by the main CPU 93 are shown in FIG. 32. It is as shown in the correspondence table.

[Race runners MAP lottery table]
First, with reference to FIG. 33, a race starter MAP lottery table will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race entrant MAP lottery table. In addition, the race runner MAP lottery table is, for example, the race runner MAP in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 to be described later) described later that is performed at the start of the game for one cycle in the non-AT state (when the normal game is started). It is referred to in the lottery process (S321) and the like.

The race entrant MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the MAP number (“1” to “39”) of the race entrant MAP and the lottery value. Note that, as will be described later, the race runner MAP (race information MAP) has a race winning target (from the current cycle to the fifth cycle of the game in the non-AT state (first race to fifth race)) of the race effect ( Data (“1” to “10”) for determining a candidate is defined.

In the race entrant MAP lottery processing using the race entrant MAP lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is raced. The lottery value corresponding to each race starter MAP number defined in the starter MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the MAP number of the race starter MAP at that time is won. For example, in the race MAP lottery process, the probability of winning the MAP number “1” is 1974/32768.

[Race information MAP data table]
Next, the race information MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the structure of the race information MAP data table. The race information MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the data acquisition process (S323) of the “target table” in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 to be described later) described later.

In the race information MAP data table, from the current cycle to the fifth cycle for each MAP number of the race starter MAP (race information MAP) determined by the race starter MAP lottery process using the race starter MAP lottery table. Data (“1” to “10”: hereinafter referred to as race information MAP data) for determining a race win target person (first race to fifth race) is defined. The race information MAP data is data corresponding to the type of “target table” defined in the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 35 described later) described later. Specifically, the race information MAP data "1" to "10" respectively correspond to "target table A" to "target table J" defined in the winning target lottery table described later.

In the data acquisition process of the “target table” using the race information MAP data table, for example, when the MAP number of the race entrant MAP (race information MAP) is “7”, the first to fifth races As race information MAP data, “2” (target table B), “1” (target table A), “2” (target table B), “1” (target table A), “8” (target table H), respectively. ) Is obtained.

[Winning lottery table]
Next, the winning target lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a configuration of a winning target lottery table. The winning target lottery table is referred to in, for example, the winning target lottery process (S325) in the later-described race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 described later).

The winning target lottery table is, for each target table type, a race winning target (“man A”, “man B”, “woman A”, “kappa”, “tengu”) of a race effect performed in a transition effect game. And "male A/male B") and the lottery value are defined. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the race effect of the transition effect game is performed even after the AT game is finished, the winning target lottery table is the target table determined by the race information MAP data table as shown in FIG. In addition to A to J, a dedicated table "after AT" is also defined.

In the winning target person lottery process using the winning target person lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to the winning target person. A lottery value corresponding to each race winning target defined in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), it means that the race victory target person has won.

For example, when the target table A is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is “1”), the probability that “Kappa” is the target of winning the race is 328/32768. Become. However, for example, when the target table G is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is “7”), the probability that “Kappa” is the target of winning the race is 0/ With 32768, "Kappa" will never win the race.

[Race win rate MAP lottery table]
Next, the race win rate MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race win rate MAP lottery table. The race win percentage MAP lottery table is referred to, for example, in the race win percentage MAP lottery process (S327) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 to be described later) described later.

The race win rate MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate MAP and the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6). In this embodiment, the race win rate MAP is “race win rate 5%”, “race win rate 10%”, “race win rate 20%”, “race win rate 30%”,
"Race win rate 50%", "Race win rate 66%", "Race win rate 80%", "Race win rate 100%", "Race win rate 2nd race 50%"-"Race win rate 5th race 50%", "Race Twenty types of winning rate 2nd race 66% to "race winning rate 5th race 66%" and "race winning rate 2nd race 80%" to "race winning rate 5th race 80%" are provided.

In the race win rate MAP lottery process using the race win rate MAP lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to the race win rate MAP. A lottery value corresponding to each race win rate MAP defined in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the race win rate MAP at that time is won. For example, when the set value is "1", the probability of winning the race win rate MAP of "the race win rate of the fifth race 50%" is 4410/32768.

[Race win rate MAP data table]
Next, the race win rate MAP data table will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the structure of the race win rate MAP data table. Further, FIG. 38 is obtained by rewriting the race win rate data (“1” to “8”) defined in the race win rate MAP data table shown in FIG. 37 to a specific win rate value (percentage display). The race win rate MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the race win rate data acquisition process (S329) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 to be described later) described later.

The race win rate MAP data table stores predetermined race win rate data ("1" to "8") for each race win rate MAP determined by the race win rate MAP lottery process. The race win rate data “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” and “8” are 5% win rate, 10% win rate and 20% win rate, respectively. %, win rate 30%, win rate 50%, win rate 66%, win rate 80% and win rate 100%.

Specifically, the race win rate MAP is “race win rate 5%”, “race win rate 10%”, “race win rate 20%”, “race win rate 30%”, “race win rate 50%”, “race win rate 66%”. , “Race win rate 80%” and “race win rate 100%”, only the race win rate data of the race effect of the current cycle (first race) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is one of "race win rate 2nd race 50%", "race win rate 2nd race 66%" and "race win rate 2nd race 80%", the first race and the second race The race win rate data for the race (one cycle ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. In addition, if the race win rate MAP is any of "Race win rate 3rd race 50%", "Race win rate 3rd race 66%" and "Race win rate 3rd race 80%", the race 1 to 3 Race win rate data up to the race (race two cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. In addition, if the race win rate MAP is one of "race win rate 4th race 50%", "race win rate 4th race 66%" and "race win rate 4th race 80%", then from race 1 to 4 Race win rate data up to the race (race three cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. Furthermore, if the race win rate MAP is any one of "Race win rate 5th race 50%", "Race win rate 5th race 66%" and "Race win rate 5th race 80%", then from race 1 to race 5 Race win rate data up to the race (race four cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table.

Then, in the race win rate data acquisition processing using the race win rate MAP data table, for example, when the race win rate MAP is “race win rate 5th race 50%”, the race win rate data of the first race to the fifth race. "2" (winning rate 10%), "2" (winning rate 10%), "2" (winning rate 10%), "2" (winning rate 10%), "5" (winning rate 50%), respectively It

[Race result lottery table]
Next, the race result lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. 39 to 41 are diagrams showing the configuration of the race result lottery table. The race result lottery table is referred to, for example, in the race result lottery process (S644) in the during-race_game start process (see FIG. 111 described later) described later.

The race result lottery table defines the correspondence between the race result (winning winning/non-winning winning) and the lottery value for each race winning rate.

In the race result lottery process using the race result lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set in the race result lottery table. The lottery value corresponding to each race result (winning winning/non-winning) defined in 1. is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). If the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the race result at that time is won.

Here, in one cycle of the non-AT state (190 games in the present embodiment), the payout number of medals corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the bell is referred to as “the number of bell payouts during the cycle”. The number of bell payouts during the cycle is counted (counted) using the bell payout number counter during the cycle in S862 of the general small and medium combination_prize winning process described later.

The race result lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 39 is referred to when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is equal to or larger than the first value (“42” in the present embodiment). In the race result lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 40, the bell payout number during the cycle is equal to or greater than the second value (“27” in this embodiment) and the first value (“42” in this embodiment). Referenced if less than. The race result lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 41 is referred to when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment).

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment) (see FIG. 41), the number of bell payouts during the cycle has a second value. The probability of winning the race result is higher than that in the above case (see FIGS. 40 and 41). In addition, when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the first value (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the race result is more than when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is greater than or equal to the first value (see FIG. 39). There is a high probability that you will win. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the predetermined value, the race result is won (AT win) than when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is equal to or more than the predetermined value. The probability increases.

[Random lottery table for selecting the winning probability data after AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration of a post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. The AT post-race victory probability data selection lottery table is referred to, for example, in the AT post-race victory expectation data selection lottery process (S716) in the AT_game start process (see FIG. 114 below) described later. It

The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the race win rate and the lottery value. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is commonly referred to regardless of the set values (1 to 6).

In the after-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process using the after-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process, first, from the range of predetermined numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning rate defined in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the winning rate at that time is won. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the race win rate selected after AT is “win rate 5%”, “win rate 10%”, “win rate 30%”, “win rate 50%” and “win rate 100”. %”.

[Pseudo BB lottery (general) table]
Next, the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table. The pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table is referred to when the sub game state is the normal state in, for example, the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 106 described later) which will be described later.

The pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table defines the correspondence between the winning/non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB game and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is simulated. The lottery value of each lottery result defined in the BB lottery (general middle) table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the lottery result at that time (the winning/non-winning of the pseudo BB game) is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table, if the internal winning combination is “normal rep”, the non-winning of the pseudo BB game is surely decided, and the internal winning combination is “confirmed”. In the case of “win”, the winning of the pseudo BB game is surely decided.

[Pseudo BB lottery (AT/AT preparation/race) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparation/race) table will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparing/race) table. The pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparation/during race) table is, for example, in the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 106 described later) described below, when the sub game state is other than the normal state (sub game state). Is an AT state, an AT preparation state, or a transition effect state).

The pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparation/during race) table also has the same configuration as the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, and the pseudo BB lottery process is performed by a similar method. Therefore, here, the structure of the pseudo BB lottery (AT in progress/AT preparing/race in progress) table and the method of pseudo BB lottery processing using the pseudo BB lottery (AT in progress/AT preparing/race in progress) table will be explained. Is omitted.

[Pseudo BB precursor lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the pseudo BB precursor lottery table will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the structure of the pseudo BB precursor lottery table. The pseudo BB precursor lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process (S587) in the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 106 described later) described later.

The pseudo BB omen lottery table defines, for each type of internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship between the number of omen games (including no omen) at the time of the pseudo BB game winning and the lottery value.

In the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set as the pseudo BB precursor. The lottery value of each number of precursor games defined in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the number of precursor games at that time is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB omen lottery process using the pseudo BB omen lottery table, when the internal winning combination is “weak Che”, the number of omen games of one game is won with a probability of 128/32768, 512/32768. The probability of winning 2 games is won, and the probability of predicting 3 games is won with a probability of 32128/32768.

[Cycle reduction lottery table]
Next, the cycle reduction lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle reduction lottery table (No. 1), and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle reduction lottery table (No. 2). The cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1, No. 2) is referred to, for example, in the cycle shortening related processing (S570) in the general medium_game start time processing (see FIGS. 104 and 105 described later) described later.

The cycle reduction lottery table defines, for each winning history data of the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of the normal game) in the game period (one cycle) in the non-AT state and the lottery value. .. In the cycle-reduction lottery table, the number of shortened games is “0”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, “50”, “60”, “70”, “ "100", "150" and "170" are provided.

In addition, the winning history data “miss 2 consecutive” of the internal winning combination in the cycle reduction lottery table (No. 1) indicates a case where the internal winning combination “missing” is won for two consecutive games. The winning history data “lip 3 consecutive” shows the case where the internal winning combination “normal rep” is won in succession for 3 games. In addition, the winning history data “bell 3 consecutive” indicates a case where the internal winning combination “3 bells” (left 3 bells and middle right 3 bells) is won three games in a row.

In addition, the winning history data “weak first shot” and “strong first shot” of the internal winning combination in the cycle reduction lottery table (No. 2) are “weak Choi” and “strong” respectively for the internal winning combination of the current game. "Che". The winning history data "weak and weak 2 consecutive" indicates a case where the internal winning combination "weak choi" is won in succession for two games, and the winning history data "strong and strong 2 consecutive" is internal winning combination "strong che". Shows the case where is won for two consecutive games. The winning history data “weak and strong 2 consecutive” shows the case where the internal winning combination “weak choi” and “strong che” are consecutively won in this order, and the winning history data “strong and weak 2 consecutive” is internal win. The case where the combination of “Strong Che” and “Weak Che” is consecutively won in this order is shown. In addition, the winning history data “Rare part triple” is the internal winning part “rare” (“weak che”, “strong che”, “watermelon”, “chance eye A”, “chance eye B” and “determined hand”. ”: The specified internal winning combination) indicates a case where the winning is performed for three consecutive games.

In the cycle shortening related process using the cycle shortening lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set in the cycle shortening lottery table. The lottery value of each specified number of shortened games is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the number of shortened games at that time is won.

For example, in the cycle shortening related process using the cycle shortening lottery table, when the winning history data is “miss three consecutive”, the number of shortened games of 10 games is won with a probability of 30720/32768, and 1600/32768 is selected. The probability of winning the shortened game of 30 games is won, and the probability of winning of the shortened game of 50 games is won with a probability of 448/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the normal game, even if the internal winning combination “miss” is continuously won, there is a possibility that a benefit of obtaining the number of shortened games (shortening the game period in the non-AT state) can be obtained.

[Pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table]
Next, the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table. The pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery processing (S598) in the general middle BB_game start time processing (see FIG. 107 described later) described later.

The pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table is a correspondence relationship between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of the normal game) and the lottery value in the non-AT state game period (one cycle) for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. Stipulate. In the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table, "0", "5", "10", "20", "30", "50", "100" and "170" are provided as the number of shortened games. However, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process, when “170” is won as the shortened game number, a privilege of 100% in the race win rate is also obtained.

In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is simulated. The lottery value of each number of shortened games defined in the BB cycle reduction lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the number of shortened games at that time is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery processing using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, when the winning history data is “miss 3 consecutive games”, there is a probability of 32112/32768 and the number of shortened games of 30 games is won. The number of shortened games of 100 games with a probability of 656/32768 is won. That is, in this embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the normal game, in the pseudo BB game state, even if the internal winning combination “miss” is continuously won, the shortened game number is acquired (in the non-AT state). There is a possibility that the benefit of shortening the game period) can be obtained. Further, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, when the internal winning combination is “reach eye lip”, not only is the winning number of 170 games shortened, but The race win rate set in the current set is updated to 100% (AT winning confirmation).

[Direct lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the directly-applied lottery table will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the configuration of the directly-applied lottery table. The direct addition lottery table is referred to when determining the number of additional AT games in, for example, the direct addition lottery process (S734) in the later-described AT BB_game start process (see FIG. 115, which will be described later). ..

The directly-on lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional AT games and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. In the present embodiment, the number of additional AT games to be added is “0” (no addition), “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, “150”, “200” and “. 300" is provided.

In the direct-on random determination process using the direct-on random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set on the direct-on random determination table. The lottery value of each specified additional AT game number is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), it means that the additional AT game number at that time is won.

For example, in the direct-up random determination process using the direct-up random determination table, when the winning history data is “miss 3 consecutive”, the probability of 32736/32768 is won to the additional AT game number of 20 games, and 32/32768. In addition to the probability of 100 games, the number of added AT games is won. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the AT game, even if the internal winning combination “Miss” is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state, a benefit of adding the number of AT games can be obtained. there is a possibility.

[AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50 to FIG. 53, an AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table will be described. 50 to 53 are diagrams showing configurations of an AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (No. 1) to an AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (No. 4), respectively. Note that these AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) tables are referred to in, for example, the Kappa Sushi MAP lottery process (S683) during the Kappa win_game start time process (see FIG. 113 to be described later) described later. It

The AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table defines the correspondence between the sushi MAP number and the lottery value for each sushi MAP number currently set. The sushi MAP is a kappa sushi MAP corresponding to the first to tenth sushi items displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the above-described kappa sushi production (AT determination game number determination game when "Kappa" is won). This is a MAP defining data (see FIG. 54 described later).

In addition, "1" to "45" are defined as sushi MAP numbers in the AT start game number lottery table (when Kappa wins). Further, since the sushi MAP is not set in the initial state, in this case, the lottery value in the “first time” column in the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table is referred to (see FIG. 53).

In the kappa sushi MAP lottery process using the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each sushi MAP number defined in the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the sushi MAP number at that time is won.

[Kappa Sushi MAP Data Table]
Next, the kappa sushi MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the structure of the Kappa Sushi MAP data table. The Kappa sushi MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi MAP data acquisition process (S684) in the Kappa victory_game start process (see FIG. 113 described later) described later.

In the kappa sushi MAP data table, kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "" corresponding to the first to tenth sushi items defined for each sushi MAP number determined by the kappa sushi MAP lottery process. 8”) is stored. That is, the Kappa sushi MAP data table is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT start game number determination game (Kappa sushi production) which is performed when "Kappa" wins the race production of the transition production game. The types of sushi items from the first game to the tenth game are defined.

In the kappa sushi MAP data table, the sushi item corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “1” is “squid”, the sushi item corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “2” is “egg”, and the kappa sushi MAP The sushi item corresponding to the data "3" is "Kappa Maki", and the sushi item corresponding to the Kappa Sushi MAP data "4" is "Salmon". The sushi item corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “5” is “Ikura”, the sushi item corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “6” is “tuna”, and the sushi item corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “7”. The sushi item is "uni", and the sushi item corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data "8" is "ise shrimp".

In the kappa sushi MAP data acquisition process using the kappa sushi MAP data table, for example, when the sushi MAP number is “1”, the kappa sushi MAP data for the first to tenth plates is respectively "1" (squid), "1" (squid), "2" (egg), "1" (squid), "4" (salmon), "1" (squid), "2" (egg), "1" "(Squid), "1" (squid) and "5" (squid) are acquired.

[Kappa game number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the kappa game number acquisition lottery table will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration of a kappa game number acquisition lottery table. The kappa game number acquisition lottery table is referred to in, for example, the kappa game number acquisition lottery process (S696) in the later-described Kappa victory_game start process (see FIG. 113 described later).

The kappa game number acquisition lottery table defines, for each kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”), a correspondence relationship between the AT start game number when the kappa wins and the lottery value. In the present embodiment, “10”, “20”, “30”, “100”, “150”, “200” and “300” are provided as the number of AT start games when the kappa wins. Further, in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table, the lottery value of “LIFE up” is also defined for each kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”). When "LIVE UP" is won, "1" is added to the value of the kappa end counter that manages the timing of ending the kappa sushi effect (AT start game number determination game).

In the kappa game number acquisition lottery processing using the kappa game number acquisition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to the kappa. Each AT start game number or the lottery value of "LIFE UP" defined in the game number acquisition lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the number of AT start games or "LIFE up" at that time is won.

For example, when the set kappa sushi MAP data is “1” (squid) and the video effect of “kappa” eating the sushi “squid” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the kappa game number acquisition lottery is conducted. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the table, the AT start game number of 10 games is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the AT start game number of 300 games with a probability of 96/32768 is won. In addition, for example, when the set Kappa sushi MAP data is “3” (Kappa Maki), and “Kappa” is a sushi item “Kappa Maki”, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays an image effect of displaying the image. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery processing using the game number acquisition lottery table, the AT start game number is not won, but “LIFE UP” is always won.

Furthermore, for example, when the set kappa sushi MAP data is “8” (Ise shrimp) and the “Kappa” eats the sushi material “Ise shrimp” on the liquid crystal display device 11, the kappa is displayed. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number lottery table, the AT start game number of 100 games is won with a probability of 27854/32768, and the AT start game number of 150, 200 or 300 games with a probability of 1638/32768. Wins. That is, in the present embodiment, in the kappa sushi production performed when "kappa" wins in the race production of the transition production game, when the production of "Kappa" eating high-quality sushi material is performed, Win a large number of AT start games.

[Kappa Sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the lottery table for kappa sushi data conversion occurrence will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a configuration of a kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table is referred to in, for example, the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery processing (S692) in the later-described Kappa victory_game start processing (see FIG. 113 described later).

The kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the winning/non-winning (lottery result) of the occurrence of kappa sushi data conversion and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set. , The lottery value of each lottery result defined in the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table, when the internal winning combination is “miss”, the probability of 31130/32768 is that the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence is non-win, With a probability of 1638/32768, Kappa sushi data conversion occurrence is won.

[Kappa sushi data conversion lottery table]
Next, the kappa sushi data conversion lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. 57 to 61 are diagrams showing configurations of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table to a kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (5 plates ahead), respectively.

The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table of FIG. 57 is a sushi item (kappa sushi MAP) displayed in the game one game ahead (second plate) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when Kappa wins. Data) conversion lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (2 plates ahead) of FIG. 58 is a sushi story conversion lottery table displayed in the game 2 games ahead (3 plates) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when Kappa wins. Is. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (3 dishes ahead) table of FIG. 59 is a conversion lottery table of sushi items displayed in the game 3 games ahead (4 dishes) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when Kappa wins. Is. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (4 plates ahead) of FIG. 60 is a conversion lottery table of sushi items displayed in the game 4 games ahead (5 plates) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when Kappa wins. Is. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (5 plates ahead) table in FIG. 61 is used to convert the sushi material displayed in the game 5 games ahead (6 plates) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when Kappa wins. It is a lottery table. In addition, each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table is referred to in, for example, the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process (S694) in the later-described Kappa victory_game start process (see FIG. 113 described later).

Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table has a correspondence relationship between the converted kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”) and the lottery value for each currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi item). Stipulate.

In the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process using each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (in the present embodiment, 0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768), The lottery value of each converted Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) defined in each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the converted Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is won.

For example, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table, when the currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi item) is “5” (tuna), With a probability of 29492/32768, kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is converted from "5" (tuna) to "7" (sea urchin), and with a probability of 3276/32768 kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "5". Converted from (tuna) to "8" (shrimp).

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 61, in the present embodiment, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process, the value of the converted kappa sushi MAP data does not become smaller than the value of the unconverted kappa sushi MAP data. That is, the number of acquired AT games after conversion does not become smaller than the number of acquired AT games before conversion by the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process. However, for example, when the currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) is “8” (shrimp), the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) is not converted in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process. ..

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 75.

[Main operation processing of pachi-slot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachi-slot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 62 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the main CPU 93 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally or the setting has been changed appropriately, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed. The details of the power-on process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data must be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 79 are checked. The details of the medal acceptance/start check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery, various random number values (0 to 65535 and/or 0 to 255) for effect can be acquired, and as necessary, for effect. Various random number values may be acquired in S4.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this processing, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop initialization processing (S6). The details of the reel stop initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation/storage process (S7). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. It should be noted that the start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for producing an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a weight process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed from the start of the previous game.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel rotation start processing (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 75 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). The rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is controlled and started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained. Further, when it is determined to perform the reel effect (lock effect) during the reel acceleration period at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the reel effect pattern and sets the reel effect in the reel rotation start process of S9. Also controls.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start command generation and storage processing (S10). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing of executing various effects and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this processing, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction-in priority data and stores it in the attraction-in priority data storage area. Details of the pull-in priority storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a prize search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 causes the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R to stop, and then the symbol combinations displayed on the activated line (winning determination line) and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12). ) And match. Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal payout processing (S14). In this process, the hopper device 51 is driven and the credit number is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S13, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the payout number of medals varies depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12), when the number of medals is three, The maximum payout number (payout upper limit) is 10.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation/storing process (S15). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing of executing various effects and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes bonus end check processing (S16). In this processing, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the timing of ending the bonus game, which are provided in the main RAM 95, and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to be ended. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process (S17). In this processing, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the re-game. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Then, when the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes from S2.

[Power-on processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a power-on process performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S21). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

For example, when the power is turned off, the set value of the pachi-slot 1 (the value for setting the payout rate to one of six predetermined levels) and the checksum value calculated from the set value are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 as backup data. It is stored. In the processing of S21, the main CPU 93 reads the set value and checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read setting value with the backed-up checksum value. If the two thumb values match, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

In S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (NO in S21), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S23 described below. On the other hand, in S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (YES in S21), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up setting value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S22). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

After the processing of S22 or when the determination of S21 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch (not shown) is in the ON state (S23). In S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (NO in S23), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S29 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S23 that the setting change switch is in the ON state (YES in S23), the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined initialization process when changing the setting (S24). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95, and also clears the set value.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization command generation/storage process (S25). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the initialization command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The initialization command data includes whether or not the setting value has been changed, setting value information, and the like.

After the processing of S25, the main CPU 93 executes setting value change processing (S26). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from among preset 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and then sets the set value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 operated thereafter. To confirm.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the setting change switch is in the on state (S27).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S27 that the setting change switch is in the ON state (YES in S27), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S27. If the setting change switch is in the ON state, it means that the operation of the setting change switch has not been completed. In this case, therefore, the main CPU 93 causes the processing of S27 until the setting change switch is not turned on. repeat.

On the other hand, in S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (NO in S27), the main CPU 93 performs the initialization command generation storage process (S28). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the initialization command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. After the processing of S28, the main CPU 93 terminates the power-on processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

Here, returning to the processing of S23 again, when the determination of S23 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S29).

In S29, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (YES in S29), the main CPU 93 restores the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S30). After the processing of S30, the main CPU 93 terminates the power-on processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when S29 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S31). In this processing, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

In this embodiment, an error (backup error) that occurs when backup is not normal cannot be canceled by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch, and a new setting change may be performed. It will be canceled.

[Medal reception/start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the medal acceptance/start check processing performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S41). Whether or not there is an automatic closing request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic loading request when the automatic loading counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic loading request when the automatic loading counter is “1” or more.

The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination relating to the replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the replay is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when S41 is NO determination), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S44 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S41 that there is an automatic insertion request (YES in S41), the main CPU 93 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared.

After the processing of S42, the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion command generation and storage processing (S43). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates data of the medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. Note that the medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals.

After the processing of S43 or when the determination of S41 is NO, the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S44). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven, and the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The received medals are counted and then guided to the hopper device 51.

Then, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number according to the game state (S45). Specifically, when the gaming state is the non-MB gaming state (including the state between flags), the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to "3". When the gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to "2".

Next, the main CPU 93 executes MAXBET loading processing (S46). In this processing, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MAX bet operation is valid or invalid, based on the game state, the number of inserted medals, and the number of credits (reserved number). The details of the MAXBET loading process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S47). In S47, when the main CPU 93 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted (NO in S47), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S52 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S47 that the medal acceptance is permitted (YES in S47), the main CPU 93 performs the medal insertion check process (S48). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and when a medal has been inserted, adds 1 to the value of the inserted number counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal insertion command generation/storage processing (S49). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates data of the medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in a state in which medals can be inserted or credits can be made (S50). In S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is in a state in which medals can be inserted or credited (YES in S50), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S52 described below. On the other hand, in S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in a state in which medals can be inserted or credited (NO in S50), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S51). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medal is ejected from the medal payout opening 32.

After the processing of S51, if S47 is NO, or if S50 is YES, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is the game startable number (S52). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted sheets is set to "1" or more.

In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game startable number (NO in S52), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46, and repeats the processes from S46. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the inserted number is the game startable number (YES in S52), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S53). ).

In S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is not on (NO in S53), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes of S46 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that the start switch 79 is on (YES in S53), the main CPU 93 performs the medal acceptance prohibition process (S54).

After the processing of S54, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance/start check processing, and moves the processing to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

[MAXBET input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the MAXBET insertion process performed in S46 during the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIG. 64) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a MAX bet operation has been performed (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the player has pressed the MAX bet button 21.

In S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation is not performed (NO in S61), the main CPU 93 terminates the MAXBET insertion process and executes the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 64). (See) S47.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the MAX bet operation has been performed (YES in S61), the main CPU 93 determines whether "2MB" or "3MB" is established (win). It is determined (S62). That is, the main CPU 93 refers to the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether the current gaming state is the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state.

When the main CPU 93 determines in S62 that "2MB" or "3MB" is not established (winning) (NO in S62), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S65 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S62 that “2 MB” or “3 MB” is established (winning) (YES in S62), the main CPU 93 determines the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits. It is determined whether or not the total of (the number of stored sheets) is “3” or more (S63).

In S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (the number of stored) is not “3” or more (NO in S63), the main CPU 93 performs the MAXBET insertion process. Upon completion, the process proceeds to S47 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S63 that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is “3” or more (YES in S63), the main CPU 93 determines the The number of sheets is set to "3" (S64). Then, after the processing of S64, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIG. 64).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state, even if the player performs a MAX bet operation, the total number of inserted medals and credits is equal to the MB flag state. If the maximum number of coins is less than "3", the number of medals to be multiplied is not set. That is, in this case, the MAX bet operation executed by the player becomes invalid.

Here, returning to the process of S62 again, when the determination of S62 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined number of credited medals (S65). At this time, one, two, or three sheets are set. After the processing of S65, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIG. 64).

As described above, in the MAXBET insertion process of the present embodiment, when the total of the current inserted number of medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than “3” in the MB flag state, the player's MAX is set. The bet operation is treated as invalid, and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91, in the MB flag state, the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than “3”, and the player's MAX bet is set. When an operation is detected, it also serves as means for invalidating the MAX bet operation by the player (bet operation invalidating means).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and determines whether the game state is the MB game state (S71).

In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game state is the MB game state (YES in S71), the main CPU 93 performs the MB in-operation process (S72). As shown in the internal lottery tables for the 2MB game state and the 3MB game state of FIGS. 19 and 20, in the MB game state, the "CB combination", that is, all the small combinations are surely won. Therefore, in the processing during MB operation, the main CPU 93 turns on the bits of all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 24). Then, after the process of S72, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game state is not the MB game state (NO in S71), the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table according to the game state (S73). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) to grasp the current game state, and determines the type of the internal lottery table.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value for internal lottery stored in the random value storage area (S74). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to obtain the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number for internal lottery (S75).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S75 is less than "0" (negative value) (S76). When the main CPU 51 determines in S76 that the calculation result is less than “0” (YES in S76), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S79 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S76 that the calculation result is not less than "0" (NO in S76), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S77). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by "1".

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S78). When it is determined in S78 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (NO in S78), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75 and repeats the processes from S75.

On the other hand, in S78, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (YES in S78), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S80 described below.

Here, returning to the processing of S76 again, when the determination of S76 is YES (when a digit is generated in the subtraction processing), the main CPU 93 causes the small win/replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number in which the digit is generated. And a bonus data pointer is acquired (S79).

After the processing of S79 or in the case of YES determination in S78, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (see FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, etc.) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small win/replay data pointer. (S80). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S81).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is "00000000" (S82). When the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not "00000000" (NO in S82), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described below.

On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the internal carryover combination storing area is “00000000” (YES in S82), the main CPU 93 determines that the internal lottery table (FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 and the like), and obtains an internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S83).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S84).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the carryover combination storing area and determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is being carried over (S85). When the main CPU 93 determines in S85 that the MB is not being carried over (when NO in S85), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described below.

On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is being carried over (YES in S85), the main CPU 93 sets the RT game state corresponding to the type of MB being carried over (S86). .. Specifically, when "2MB" is being carried over (between 2MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT state (bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). "1" is stored (set) in. On the other hand, if "3MB" is being carried over (between 3MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 game state as the RT state ("1" in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27). Is stored (set).

After the process of S86, or when S82 or S85 is NO determination, the main CPU93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area (S87). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 62).

As described above, the internal lottery process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a unit (internal winning combination determining unit) that executes a process for determining an internal winning combination. In S86 during the internal lottery process described above, the RT game state corresponding to the type of MB being carried over is shifted. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a unit (replay time state control unit) that controls the transition of the RT game state.

[Reel stop initialization processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the reel stop initialization process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S91).

In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game state is the MB game state (YES in S91), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S93 described below. On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO in S91), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the small win/replay data pointer as the spinning cylinder stop number. Yes (S92).

After the process of S92 or when the determination of S91 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and responds to the spinning cylinder stop number based on the acquired spinning cylinder stop number. Various information is acquired (S93). In this process, the number of the reel stop table used during the first stop to the third stop and information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and the reels are stopped at a specific position) Information for reselecting the stop table) and the like are acquired again.

In the reel stop initialization table, the correspondence between the spinning cylinder stop number and various pieces of information such as pull-in priority table selection data and pull-in priority table number, which will be described later, is defined. The stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is set so that the reel is stopped at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to give a disadvantage to the player and not to generate a wrong prize by using the prescribed information. Is specified.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S94).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S95). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initialization process, and moves the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 62). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Import priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the attraction-in priority storage processing performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S102). In this processing, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the reels that are rotating and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in the process of S102, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S111, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S102 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S111, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S102 again, next, the right reel 3R is determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S103). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the position data of the search symbol and "20" as the number of symbol checks (S104). Then, the main CPU 93 performs a symbol code storage process (S105). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol, which is located on the effective line of the reel to be searched, is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of effective lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 25) based on the symbol code acquired in S105 and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 30) (S106). At this point, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable winning combination) is stored in the display winning combination storage area on the basis of the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

In this embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the displayable hand corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel that is stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be obtained from data that defines the correspondence between the symbols of the reels stopped and the corresponding displayable winning combinations, or the symbols of the stopped reels. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12) may be collated and acquired. In the case of using the former method, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable winning combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 93, with respect to the winning combination having the bit set to "1" in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 25) and the winning combination storing area to "1", has a pull-in priority. By referring to a ranking table (not shown), the attraction priority data is acquired.

The attraction-in priority table is a table that defines a correspondence relationship between attraction-in priority data for each storage area type and a predetermined priority in each attraction-in priority table number. The pull-in priority table is used for searching whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbol combination related to winning a prize is preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in). In addition, normally, the priority is set in the order of replay, small win, and bonus from the highest.

Further, if the symbol position is an incorrect winning when stopped, "use prohibited (000H)" is acquired as the attraction-in priority data in S107. Furthermore, if the symbol position is not an internal winning, but does not cause an erroneous winning even if stopped, in S107, "stoppable (001H)" is acquired as the attraction-in priority data.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in an attraction priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S108). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area such that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a storage area for priority data for each reel type. In each attraction priority data storage area, attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

Further, the content of the priority attraction-in data stored in the attraction-in priority data storage area varies depending on the type of attraction-in priority table number in the attraction-in priority table referred to when determining the attraction-in priority data. The larger the value of the attraction-in priority data, the higher the priority.

By referring to the attraction-in priority data, it is possible to make a relative evaluation of the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the attraction-in priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the attraction-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the attraction-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 93 adds "1" to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts "1" from the number of symbol checks (S109). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (NO in S110), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S105 and repeats the processes from S105. On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (YES in S110), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of times of search has been searched (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has not performed the search for the number of times of search (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S102 and repeats the processes from S102. On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has searched the number of times of search (YES in S111), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction-in priority storage process, and the process proceeds to S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 62). Move to.

[Selection process of pull-in priority table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the attraction-in priority table selection processing performed in S103 in the attraction-priority storage processing flowchart (see FIG. 68) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table selection data is set (S121).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S121 that the attraction-in priority table selection data is set (YES in S121), the main CPU 93 determines that the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and the operation stop button storage area are set. (See FIG. 28), the attraction priority table number corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data is set from the attraction priority table selection table (not shown) (S122). Then, after the processing of S122, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection processing, and moves the processing to S104 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 68).

The attraction-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the attraction-in priority selection numbers and the stop button pressing order, and the attraction-in priority table numbers in each combination. Further, the attraction-in priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction-in priority table (not shown) described above.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S121 that the attraction priority table selection data is not set (NO in S121), the main CPU 93 determines the attraction priority table corresponding to the attraction priority table number. Set (S123). Then, after the processing of S123, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection processing, and moves the processing to S104 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 68).

[Symbol code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the symbol code storage processing performed in S105 in the flowchart of the attraction-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 68) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S131). In this embodiment, one line (center line) is provided as the effective line as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S132). For example, when the reel to be searched is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to obtain information on the middle row of the reel to be searched, the check symbol position data indicating the middle row is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the checking symbol position data (S133). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, then ends the symbol code storage process, and moves the process to S106 of the attraction-in priority storage process (see FIG. 68).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S141). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO in S141), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S141, and the valid stop button pressing operation is executed. Wait until.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S141 that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES in S141), the main CPU 93 determines that the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 29). 28) is updated (S142). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the value of the stop button non-operation counter (S143).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the reel to be searched from the operation stop button (S144). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S145).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the number-of-slip-pieces determination data based on the type of the stop button at the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a priority attraction-in control process (S147). In this process, the attraction priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" or "1" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority attraction-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop command generation/storage processing (S148). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The reel stop command transmitted in this processing includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces thereof, ON edge/OFF edge of the stop switch, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data acquired in S146, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S149). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position and sets the result as the planned stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S149 as the search symbol position (S150). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 70 (S151). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) using the acquired symbol code (S152).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing (S153). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S154). When the main CPU 93 determines in S154 that the non-operation counter is not "0" (NO in S154), the main CPU 93 performs the attraction-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 68 (S155). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S141 and repeats the processing from S141.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S154 that the non-operation counter is "0" (YES in S154), the main CPU 93 terminates the reel stop control process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. 62). (See) S13.

As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a unit (stop control unit) that executes stop control of reel rotation (variable display of symbols).

[Priority access control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the priority attraction-in control process performed in S147 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 71) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S161). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires data on the stop start position (S162).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is operating (S163). When the main CPU 93 determines in S163 that the MB is not in operation (NO in S163), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S163 that the MB is operating (YES in S163), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search target reel is the left reel 3L (S164). ..

In S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel to be searched is not the left reel 3L (NO in S164), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S164 that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (YES in S164), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S167 described below.

When NO is determined in S163 or S164 (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 frames and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets a priority table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data (S165).

The priority order table includes a sliding frame number determination data obtained based on the stop table and a predetermined numerical value range as the sliding frame number (“0” to “4 when the maximum sliding frame number is 4 frames”). )), the order of priority application (hereinafter referred to as “priority order”) is defined. That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of sliding pieces to be preferentially applied is determined for each sliding piece number determination data. In the present embodiment, each numerical value is sequentially searched (checked) from the lower priority order “5” in the priority order table, and the numerical value corresponding to the priority order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding pieces. To do so. Then, in the processing of S165, for example, when the sliding piece number determination data is “4”, the priority order data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data “4” is Is set.

After the processing of S165, the main CPU 93 sets "5" to the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S166). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) five times within the range of 0 to 4 frames. Then, after the processing of S166, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

Further, if S164 is YES (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is one and stop control of the reel is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the priority table for the MB gaming state corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data. (S167). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the initial value of the priority order to "3" and the number of checks to "2" (S168). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) twice within the range of 0 frame to 1 frame. Then, after the processing of S168, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

After the processing of S166 or S168, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding frame number determination data as the sliding frame number (S169).

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S170). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the attraction-in priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or greater than the value of the attraction-in priority data previously acquired (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is not equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (NO in S172), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S174 described below. ..

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S172 that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (YES in S172), the main CPU 93 determines the number of sliding pieces. It is updated (S173).

After the processing of S173 or when the determination of S172 is NO, the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the value of the priority order and the number of checks (S174).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the number of checks is “0” (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (NO in S175), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S170 and repeats the processes from S170.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the number of checks is "0" (YES in S175), the main CPU 93 sets the finally updated number of sliding pieces (S176). Then, after the processing of S176, the main CPU 93 ends the priority attraction-in control processing, and moves the processing to S148 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 71).

[Bonus end check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the bonus end check processing performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is operating (S181). In S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (NO in S181), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 62). Transfer.

On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (YES in S181), the main CPU 93 performs CB end processing (S182). In this process, a game state flag (not shown) corresponding to "CB" is turned off, and a possible winning number counter and a possible game number counter are cleared. Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (S183).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S184). In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO in S184), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 62) and moves to S17.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES in S184), the main CPU 93 performs the MB end process (S185). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (2MB gaming state flag or 3MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the operating MB ("2MB" or "3MB"). To do. In addition, when the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, the payout of medals exceeds 2 during the 2MB game state, or the payout of medals exceeds 30 during the 3MB game state. Means when

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end command generation/storage process (S186). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates the data of the bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Then, after the processing of S186, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 62).

[Bonus activation check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the bonus operation check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is operating (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when S191 is NO determination), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S193 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S191 that the MB is in operation (YES in S191), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing (S192). Then, after the processing of S192, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

Further, when the determination in S191 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is a winning prize (S193). In S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not a winning prize (NO in S193), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S197 described below.

On the other hand, in S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is a winning prize (YES in S193), the main CPU 93 performs the MB operation process corresponding to the type of the winning MB (S194). In this processing, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and sets the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value ("30" or "2"). Set to. Further, in this processing, the main CPU 93 also performs the CB operation processing of S192.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value in the carryover combination storing area (S195). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus start command generation/storage process (S196). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

Then, after the processing of S196, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

When S193 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination of the replay (replay) has been won (S197). In S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to the replay has not been won (NO in S197), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 62). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to the replay has won (YES in S197), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S198). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the inserted number counter to the automatic inserted number counter. Then, after the processing of S198, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S201). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S203). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 93 clears the game lock flag.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel control processing (S204). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all reels is requested, and thereafter, the respective reels rotate at a constant speed. Drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits until the updated symbol counter coincides with the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the reel display window 4), and falls under this condition. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S204, in addition to the above-described normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing, and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set during acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is handled. It also performs reel effect control and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs command data transmission processing (S205). In this processing, the main CPU 93 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp/7-segment driving process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 24 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S207). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt processing.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 128. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, etc. are provided in the sub RAM 103.

[Sub CPU power-on processing]
First, the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. The request process in the power-on process shown in FIG. 76 is a process of requesting the OS to activate various tasks necessary for the function of the pachi-slot 1.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs initialization processing (S211). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes processing such as initialization of the CPU and internal devices and initialization of peripheral ICs.

Next, the sub CPU 102 issues a start request for the lamp control task (see FIG. 77 described later) as a sub task start request (S212). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for a sound control task (see FIG. 78 described later) (S213). Then, the sub CPU 102 issues a start request for the mother task (see FIG. 79 described later) (S214).

[Lamp control task]
Next, the lamp control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the power-on process (see FIG. 76) of the sub CPU 102 described above, when the lamp control task request is generated from the OS in response to the lamp control task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the lamp control task is executed according to the procedure described below. Executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs timer interrupt initialization processing (S221). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process of lamp control-related data (S222).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt waiting process (S223). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an execution process of a sound control task (see FIG. 78 described later) (S224).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp data analysis processing (S225). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp effect execution process (S226). Then, after the processing of S226, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S223 and repeats the processing of S223 and thereafter.

[Sound control task]
Next, the sound control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 76) described above, when a sound control task request is generated from the OS in response to a sound control task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the sound control task is executed according to the procedure described below. Executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process of data related to sound control (S231). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the lamp control task (see FIG. 77) (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data analysis processing (S233). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect execution process (S234). After the processing of S234, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S232 and repeats the processing of S232 and thereafter.

[Mother task]
Next, the mother task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the power-on process (see FIG. 76) of the sub CPU 102 described above, when the OS issues a mother task request in response to the mother task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the mother task is executed according to the procedure described below. ..

First, the sub CPU 102 issues a request to activate a main task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S241). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for the main board communication task (see FIG. 81 described later) (S242). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to activate an animation task (see FIG. 82 described later) (S243).

[Main task]
Next, the main task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described mother task of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 79), when the OS issues a main task request in response to a main task activation request from the sub CPU 102, the main task is executed according to the procedure described below.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronizing Signal) interrupt initialization process (S251). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC interrupt waiting process (S252).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs drawing processing (S253). Then, after the processing of S253, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S252, and repeats the processing of S252 and thereafter.

[Main board communication task]
Next, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-mentioned mother task of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 79), when the OS issues a main board communication task request in response to a start request for the main board communication task from the sub CPU 102, main board communication is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs initialization processing of the communication message queue (S261). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a received command check process (S262). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of received command and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one is received (S263).

In S263, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command different from the previous command is not received (NO in S263), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S262, and repeats the processes from S262. On the other hand, in S263, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a command different from the previous time is received (YES in S263), the sub CPU 102 generates various game information based on the received command, and the generated various types of game information. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S264).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs command analysis processing (S265). The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. Then, after the processing of S265, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S262 and repeats the processing of S262 and thereafter.

[Anime task]
Next, the animation task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 79) described above, when the OS issues an animation task request in response to the animation task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the animation task is executed according to the procedure described below.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change in the current game information generated by the main board communication task from the previous game information (S271). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs object control processing (S272).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs animation task management processing (S273). Then, after the processing of S273, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S271 and repeats the processing of S271 and thereafter.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the command analysis processing performed in S265 in the flowchart of the main board communication task (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs effect content determination processing (S281). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content according to the received data. Note that details of the effect content determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp data determination processing (S282). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined lamp data according to the effect contents determined in S281. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data determination processing (S283). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined sound data according to the effect contents determined in S281.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the determined various data (S284). After the processing of S284, the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis processing and moves the processing to S262 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 81).

[Production content determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the effect contents determination process performed in S281 in the flowchart of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83) will be described. The effect data determined (registered) in the following process is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered in each of the following processes, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as the image display is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is time to receive an initialization command (S291).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S291 that the initialization command is being received (YES in S291), the sub CPU 102 performs the initialization command reception process (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the initialization process based on information such as the presence or absence of a change in the set value and the set value, which are included in the initialization command. Details of the initialization command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later. Then, after the processing of S292, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect contents determination processing, and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S291 that the initialization command is not received (NO in S291), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command is received (S293).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S293 that the medal insertion command is received (YES in S293), the sub CPU 102 performs the medal insertion command reception process (S294). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines effect data at the time of inserting a medal (at the time of betting) based on information such as the presence/absence of insertion of a medal, the value of the insertion number counter, the value of the credit counter, etc. included in the medal insertion command. (sign up. Then, after the process of S294, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and moves the process to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S293 that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO in S293), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the start command has been received (S295).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S295 that the start command is being received (YES in S295), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command receiving process (S296). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 includes information such as the type of the game state flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the flag related to the lock effect, the value of the effect timer, etc., which are included in the start command. Based on, the effect data at the start of the game (at the start) is determined (registered). Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S296, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect contents determination processing, and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S295 that the start command has not been received (NO in S295), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S297).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S297 that the reel rotation start command is being received (YES in S297), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel rotation start command reception process (S298). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of reel rotation based on the reel rotation start command. Then, after the processing of S298, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect contents determination processing, and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S297 that the reel rotation start command is not received (NO in S297), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the reel stop command is received (S299).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S299 that the reel stop command is being received (YES in S299), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception process (S300). In this process, the sub CPU 102 generates the effect data when the reel is stopped based on the information such as the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of slide pieces, and the effect number, which are included in the reel stop command. Make a decision (register). Then, after the process of S300, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and moves the process to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S299 that the reel stop command has not been received (NO in S299), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the winning operation command reception (S301).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S301 that the winning operation command is being received (YES in S301), the sub CPU 102 performs the winning operation command reception processing (S302). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of winning operation based on the information such as the type of display combination, the flag related to the lock effect, the number of paid out medals, etc., which is included in the winning operation command. .. The details of the winning operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later. Then, after the process of S302, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S301 that the sub CPU 102 has not received the winning operation command (NO in S301), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus start command has been received (S303).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S303 that the bonus start command is received (YES in S303), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus start command reception process (S304). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) effect data at the time of starting the bonus based on the bonus start command. Then, after the processing of S304, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect contents determination processing, and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S303 that the bonus start command is not received (NO in S303), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S305).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S305 that the bonus end command is being received (YES in S305), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus end command reception time process (S306). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of ending the bonus based on the bonus end command. Then, after the processing of S306, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect contents determination processing, and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S305 that the bonus end command is not received (NO in S305), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the input state command is received (S307).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S307 that the input state command has not been received (NO in S307), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and executes the command analysis process (see FIG. 83) in S282. Move to.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S307 that the input state command is received (YES in S307), the sub CPU 102 performs the input state command reception process (S308). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data when the input state command is received, based on, for example, the information of the on-edge state/off-edge state of each operation unit included in the input state command. Then, after the process of S308, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83).

[Process when receiving initialization command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, an initialization command reception process performed in S292 in the flow chart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84) will be described.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub game state in the previous unit game (game) (hereinafter, referred to as “game state (previous)”), the sub game state in the current unit game (hereinafter, “game state”). (Currently)), and the sub game state in the next unit game (hereinafter, referred to as "game state (next time)") are managed.

In the following, the case where the sub game state is the normal state is referred to as "general medium", and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the normal state is referred to as "general medium BB". The case where the sub game state is the transition effect state is referred to as "during race", and the case where the sub game state is the AT ready state is referred to as "AT preparing". Further, when the sub game state is the AT state is referred to as "AT in progress", and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the AT state is referred to as "AT in progress BB". Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the sub game state is the W chance state is referred to as "during the W chance", and the case where the sub game state is the additional challenge state is referred to as the "additional challenge state".

First, the sub CPU 102 initializes a payout-related variable (S311). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "general medium" to the gaming state (previous), the gaming state (current), and the gaming state (next time), respectively. Further, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "180".

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race information lottery process (S312). The details of the race information lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later. Then, after the process of S312, the sub CPU 102 ends the initialization command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84).

[Race information lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the race information lottery processing performed in S312 in the flowchart of the initialization command reception processing (see FIG. 85) will be described. In this race information lottery processing, various information related to the race effect of the character performed in the transition effect game is randomly determined.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs race MAP lottery processing with reference to the race MAP lottery table (see FIG. 33) (S321). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result value (MAP number) of the race entrant MAP lottery process to "race entrant MAP" (S322).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 34), and based on the value of the “race runner MAP” (race information MAP number), the winning target lottery table corresponding to the race information MAP data. The type (target tables A to J) of (see FIG. 35) is determined (S323). In this process, the "target table" (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data up to the fourth race (first race to fifth race) based on the set value of the race starter MAP (race information MAP). Any one of A to J) is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the "target table" of the determined first race to the fifth race (S324). Then, the sub CPU 102 performs the lottery processing of the race victory target (candidate) person from the first race to the fifth race based on the "target table" from the first race to the fifth race set in S324 ( S325).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to “race winner” (S326). By this process, the race winners from the 1st race to the 5th race (any one of "male A", "male B", "female A", "tengu", "kappa" and "male A/male B" Or) is set as the "race winner".

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the race win rate MAP lottery process with reference to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 36) (S327). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 defines the race win rate MAP that defines the race win rate data of the "race winner" (race win target person) set in S326 based on the current set value (one of 1 to 6). To decide. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S328).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 37) and acquires the race win rate data corresponding to the set "race win rate map" (S329). In this process, as shown in FIG. 37, only the race win rate data of the race of the current set (first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data of the second and subsequent races may be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S329 (S330).

After the processing of S330, the sub CPU 102 finishes the race information lottery processing and also finishes the initialization command reception processing (see FIG. 85). As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the initialization command is received (when the information regarding the content of the race effect is not set in the initial state), the race win target of the race effect executed in the transition effect game. The (candidate) person and the winning rate are determined.

As described above, in the race information lottery process of the present embodiment, at the start of the game period of the normal game, the information regarding the content of the race effect is determined from the first race to the fifth race (4 sets ahead from the current set), This processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the information on the effect contents of each transition effect game performed after the end of the normal game from the current set to the fourth set at the start of the game period of the normal game ( It also serves as a transition effect determination means).

[Process when start command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the start command reception process performed in S296 in the flow chart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a variable setting process (S341). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the sub game state. The details of the variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a payout state update process (S342). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the information on the gaming state (previous), the gaming state (current), and the gaming state (next). The details of the payout state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a Bns (bonus) state update process (S343). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of setting various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the pseudo BB state. The details of the Bns state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

The types of pseudo BB states managed in the present embodiment are “at the time of winning BB”, “between BB flags”, “waiting for BB”, “during BB”, “during JAC”, “during ChaBB”, and “during ChaJAC”. There are 7 types. In addition, "between BB flags" indicates a state where the pseudo BB game is carried over, and "during JAC" indicates a state of "JAC GAME guaranteed section". In addition, “ChaBB middle” indicates the state of “JACIN challenge section” in “general middle BB”, and “ChaJAC middle” indicates the state of “JACIN challenge section” in “AT middle BB”.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is "general medium" when the game starts (hereinafter, referred to as "general medium_game start time") (S344).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S344 that the sub game state is "general medium_game start time" (YES in S344), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium_game start time process (S345). .. The details of the general medium_game start processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105 described later. Then, after the processing of S345, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S344, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general medium_game start time" (when S344 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102, the sub game state "general medium BB" game It is determined whether it is the start time (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle BB_game start time") (S346).

In S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "general medium BB_game start time" (YES in S346), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_game start time process (S347). .. The details of the general BB_game start time process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later. Then, after the processing of S347, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described below.

On the other hand, in S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general medium BB_game start time" (NO in S346), the sub CPU 102 starts the game in which the sub game state is "race". It is determined whether or not it is time (hereinafter, referred to as "during race_start of game") (S348).

In S348, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "during race_game start" (when YES in S348), the sub CPU 102 performs race_game start time process (S349). .. The details of the processing during race_game start time will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S349, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S348, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “during race_game start” (when S348 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “AT preparing”. It is determined whether or not it is the start time (hereinafter, referred to as "AT preparing_game start time") (S350).

In S350, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT preparing_at game start" (YES in S350), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparing_game start process ( S351). The details of the AT preparation_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S351, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S350 that the sub game state is not "AT preparing_at game start" (NO in S350), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT in progress". It is determined whether or not it is a start time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT_game start time”) (S352).

In S352, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT_game start time" (S352 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs AT_game start time process (S353). .. The details of the AT_game start time process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. Then, after the processing of S353, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S352 that the sub game state is not "AT_game start time" (NO in S352), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT BB". It is determined whether or not it is the start time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT BB_game start time”) (S354).

In S354, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT BB_game start time" (YES in S354), the sub CPU 102 performs AT BB_game start time process (S355). .. The details of the BB_game start processing during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. Then, after the processing of S355, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S354 that the sub game state is not "AT BB_game start time" (NO in S354), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S356 described below.

After the processing of S345, S347, S349, S351, S353, or S355, or when the determination of S354 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB precursor counter management processing (S356). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB predictor counter indicating the number of remaining predictive games until the activation of the pseudo BB game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a game state setting process (S357). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the game state (next time). The details of the game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later. After the processing of S357, the sub CPU 102 terminates the start command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

Although not shown in FIG. 87, in the series of repeated processing of the sub game state determination processing and the game start time processing described above during the start command reception processing, the sub game state is actually “W chance”. It is also possible to perform a determination process of whether or not it is and a game start process of "during a W chance", a determination process of whether or not the sub game state is "additional challenge" and a game start process of "additional challenge in progress" Be seen.

[Variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the variable setting process performed in S341 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (next time) is "general medium" (S361).

In S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is "general medium" (YES in S361), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium_variable setting process (S362). Details of the general medium_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Then, after the processing of S362, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S367 described later.

On the other hand, in S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is not "general" (when S361 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is pseudo BB ("general medium"). BB” or “BB in AT”) or not (S363).

In S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is in the pseudo BB (YES in S363), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB medium_variable setting process (S364). Details of the BB_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Then, after the processing of S364, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S367 described below.

On the other hand, in S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is not in the pseudo BB (NO in S363), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the game state (next time) is “AT preparing”. It is determined whether or not (S365).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S365 that the gaming state (next time) is "AT preparing" (YES in S365), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparing_variable setting processing (S366). The details of the AT preparation_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Then, after the processing of S366, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S367 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S365 that the game state (next time) is not "AT preparing" (NO in S365), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S367 described below.

After the processing of S362, S364 or S366, or when the determination of S365 is NO, is the sub CPU 102 at the end of the game in which the game state (current) is "general" (hereinafter referred to as "general end")? It is determined whether or not (S367).

In S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "at the time of general end" (when YES is determined in S367), the sub CPU 102 performs general end time_variable setting processing (S368). Details of the general end time_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Then, after the processing of S368, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S373 described later.

On the other hand, in S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not "at the time of general end" (when S367 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "general medium BB" or It is determined whether or not it is the time of ending the game of "AT BB" (hereinafter referred to as "time of BB ending") (S369).

In S369, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is “at the end of BB” (YES in S369), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB end_variable setting process (S370). The details of the BB end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Then, after the processing of S370, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S373 described later.

On the other hand, in S369, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not “at the time of BB end” (when S369 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102, the game state (current) is “race” game It is determined whether or not it is the end time (hereinafter, referred to as “race end time”) (S371).

In S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is “at the end of the race” (YES in S371), the sub CPU 102 performs the end of race_variable setting process (S372). The details of the race end time_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Then, after the processing of S372, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S373 described later.

On the other hand, in S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not “at the end of the race” (NO in S371), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S373 described below.

After the processing of S368, S370, or S372, or when the determination of S371 is NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes the "number of G (game) immediately above AT" (S373). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the number of additional AT games. After the processing of S373, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting processing and moves the processing to S342 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

Further, although not shown in FIG. 88, in the series of repeated processing of the above-mentioned game state (next time) determination processing and variable setting processing during the variable setting processing, the game state (next time) is actually "in race". , "During AT", "during W chance" and "during additional challenge", and a variable setting process in these sub gaming states is also performed. In the variable setting process when the game state (next time) is “during a W chance”, “5” is set as the number of bell navigations.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 88, in the series of repeated processing of the above-mentioned game state (current) determination processing and variable setting processing during the variable setting processing, the game state (current) is actually “W chance is in Also, a process of determining whether or not it is one of "and an additional challenge", and a variable setting process in these sub game states are also performed. In the variable setting process when the game state (current) is "during W chance", "5" is set as the number of Bell navigation.

[General_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the general_variable setting process performed in S362 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general medium”) (S381).

In S381, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S381), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting process and executes the process. The process proceeds to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S381, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S381), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “in race”. It is determined whether there is any (S382).

In S382, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not “in race” (when S382 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting process, and the process is the variable setting process. The process moves to S367 (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in S382, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "in race" (YES in S382), the sub CPU 102 determines the next cycle ( The number of shortened games (next shortened game number) in the game period of the non-AT state of the next set) is calculated (S383).

In addition, "Ojuku point" is the total number of shortening games of the surplus generated by the cycle shortening lottery (may be plural times) performed during the normal game of the current cycle (current set), and the pseudo BB game. It corresponds to the total number of games of the total number of shortened games for the surplus generated by the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery performed (may be plural times).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "180" in the cycle counter (S384). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the next shortened game number calculated in S383 from the value (180) of the cycle counter (S385). By this processing, the subtraction result is set as the number of stay games in the normal state in the next set. Then, after the processing of S385, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S367 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

As described above, in S585 of the general medium_variable setting process of the present embodiment, the next shortened game number (the surplus shortened game number in the current set) is subtracted from the set game number (180 games) of the next set of normal games. Processing is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (game number subtraction unit) that subtracts the number of surplus shortened games from the number of set games of the next set of normal games.

[BB _ variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the BB_variable setting process performed in S364 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general BB” or “AT BB”) (S391).

In S391, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S391), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_variable setting process and executes the process. The process proceeds to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S391 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S391), the sub CPU 102 indicates that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0". It is determined whether or not (S392).

In S392, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (NO in S392), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in_variable setting process and performs the variable setting process ( (See FIG. 88) (S367).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S392 that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (YES in S392), the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the BB precursor counter ("-1" is set). Set) (S393). Then, after the process of S393, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_variable setting process, and moves the process to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88).

[AT preparing_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the AT preparing_variable setting process performed in S366 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparing”) (S401).

In S401, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S401), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting process, and the process To S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S401, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S401), the sub CPU 102 determines the "race victory flag" and the "race racer map". , "Race win rate map" and "race consecutive loss counter" are cleared (S402).

The "race victory flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the set "race winner" (race victory target (candidate)) wins the race production. When the "race winner" wins the race, , "1" is set in the "race victory flag". The "race consecutive defeat counter" is a counter that manages the number of times the set "race winner" is continuously defeated in the race effect (the number of times the AT is not won in succession). In the present embodiment, if the "race winner" loses the race performance ten times in a row (at the time of ceiling), the AT win is awarded.

Then, after the process of S402, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting process, and moves the process to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88).

[General end_variable setting process]
Next, the general end time_variable setting process performed in S368 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“at the time of general end”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S411).

In S411, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S411), the sub CPU 102 ends the general end time_variable setting process, and the process To step S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S411 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S411), the sub CPU 102 clears the "winning combination history" (S412). ..

The “winning combination history” is data representing the winning history of the internal winning combination of 5 games (including “miss”, “small combination” and “replay”) and is used for the cycle reduction lottery and the direct addition lottery. To be

Then, after the processing of S412, the sub CPU 102 ends the general end time_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S373 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

[End of BB_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the BB end time_variable setting process performed in S370 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“general BB” or “AT BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S421).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S421 that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S421), the sub CPU 102 terminates the BB end_variable setting process, and the process To step S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S421, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (YES in S421), the sub CPU 102 initializes the “BB game counter” (“−”). 1" is set) (S422). The "BB game counter" is a counter that manages the number of remaining games in the JACIN challenge section (the section in which the game of the push order two-choice challenge for JACGAME acquisition is performed).

Then, after the processing of S422, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB end_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S373 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

[End of race_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the race end time_variable setting process executed in S372 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“during race”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S431).

In S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S431), the sub CPU 102 ends the race end_variable setting process, and the process To step S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S431 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S431), the sub CPU 102 determines "the number of race games" and "race occurrence flag". , "After-AT race flag" and "race win rate rewriting flag" data are cleared (S432).

The "race game number" is data for managing the number of elapsed games (1 to 10 games) in the race effect performed in the transition effect game, and the "race occurrence flag" indicates whether to generate the race effect. It is a flag that indicates. Further, the "race race after AT" is a flag indicating whether or not a race effect is generated after AT, and the "race win rate rewriting flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the data of the race win rate is rewritten. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the "rare part" is won in the game in the normal state, the lottery for increasing the race win rate is performed. When the lottery for increasing the race win rate is won, the "race win rate rewriting flag" is turned on.

Then, after the processing of S432, the sub CPU 102 ends the race end_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S373 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

[Falling status update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the payout state update process performed in S342 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (S451).

In S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (previous) is not different from the game state (current) (NO in S451), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S453 described below. On the other hand, in S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (present) (YES in S451), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (previous) to the gaming state (current). Is set (S452).

After the processing of S452 or when the determination of S451 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S453). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S453 that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S453), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout state update process and starts the process. The process moves to S343 of the command reception process (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S453 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S453), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is in the gaming state (next). Is set (S454). After the processing of S454, the sub CPU 102 ends the payout state update processing, and moves the processing to S343 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

[Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the Bns state setting process performed in S343 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “at the time of winning the BB” (S461).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S461 that the pseudo BB state is “at BB winning” (YES at S461), the sub CPU 102 performs BB winning _Bns state setting processing (S462). The details of the BB winning_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later. Then, after the processing of S462, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S461 that the pseudo BB state is not "at the time of winning the BB" (NO determination in S461), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags". Is determined (S463).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S463 that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” (YES in S463), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB flag_Bns state setting process (S464). Note that details of the BB flag_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. Then, after the processing of S464, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S463 that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" (NO in S463), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation". Is determined (S465).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S465 that the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (YES in S465), the sub CPU 102 performs BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing (S466). The details of the BB operation wait_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S466, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S465 that the pseudo BB state is not "waiting for BB operation" (NO determination in S465), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "BB in progress". It is determined (S467).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S467 that the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” (YES in S467), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB in_Bns state setting process (S468). The details of the BB_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S468, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S467 that the pseudo BB state is not "BB in progress" (NO in S467), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "JAC in progress". Yes (S469).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S469 that the pseudo BB state is “JAC in progress” (YES in S469), the sub CPU 102 performs JAC in_Bns state setting processing (S470). The details of the JAC_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S470, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S469 that the pseudo BB state is not "JAC in progress" (NO in S469), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "ChaBB in progress". Yes (S471).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S471 that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (YES in S471), the sub CPU 102 performs ChaBB in_Bns state setting processing (S472). Note that details of the ChaBB_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S472, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S471 that the pseudo BB state is not "ChaBB in progress" (NO in S471), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "ChaJAC in progress". Yes (S473).

In S473, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC in progress” (YES in S473), the sub CPU 102 performs ChaJAC in_Bns state setting processing (S474). Note that details of the ChaJAC_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later. Then, after the processing of S474, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S473 that the pseudo BB state is not "ChaJAC in progress" (NO in S473), the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process and starts the process at the time of receiving the start command. (See FIG. 87) The process moves to S344.

[BB winning state_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the BB winning_Bns state setting process performed in S462 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “between BB flags” (S481). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB flag_Bns state setting process (S482). Note that details of the BB flag_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. Then, after the processing of S482, the sub CPU 102 finishes the BB winning _Bns state setting process, and also finishes the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[BB flag state_Bns state setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 98, between BB flags_Bns performed in S464 in the flowchart of Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 96) or in S482 in the flowchart of BB winning _Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 97). The state setting process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (S491).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S491 that the gaming state (current) is not "general BB" or "AT BB" (NO in S491), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S493 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S491 that the game state (current) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (YES in S491), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo BB state to " "Wait for BB operation" (S492).

After the process of S492 or when the determination of S491 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB operation wait_Bns state setting process (S493). The details of the BB operation wait_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S493, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB flag_Bns state setting processing, and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 96) or the BB winning _Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 97).

[BB operation wait_Bns state setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 99, the BB operation wait_Bns performed in S466 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) or S493 in the flowchart of the BB flag_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 98). The state setting process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “BB rush flag” is in the on state (S501). The "BB entry flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the pseudo BB state shifts from "waiting for BB operation" to "during BB". When the flag is on, the pseudo BB state is " Then, the pseudo BB game is started.

In S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush flag is not in the ON state (NO in S501), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation wait_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 96). (Refer to FIG. 98) or the BB flag-to-BB flag state setting process (see FIG. 98) is also ended.

On the other hand, in S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush flag is in the on state (YES in S501), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB rush flag in the off state (S502). Next, the sub CPU 102 causes the pseudo BB state to transit to "BB in progress" (S503).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value "2" to the "BB guaranteed JAC number" (S504). The "BB guaranteed JAC number" is the number of successful JACINs guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section (the number of times JACGAME is executed), and in the present embodiment, JACGAME is guaranteed twice in the JACGAME guaranteed section.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB game counter to the initial value "10" (S505).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value “5” to the value of “number of times of JAC Bell-navi” (S506). In the present embodiment, one JAC GAME game period is managed by the number of navigations (number of Bell navigations) of the small wins related to the “push order bell” (CT bell) in which 10 medals are paid out, and is managed 5 times. When the number of times of Bell navigation is over, one JAC GAME game period ends. The "number of times of JAC Bell-navi" represents the number of times of remaining Bernavi in JAC GAME.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the "penalty flag" (S507). The "penalty flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a penalty has occurred. Then, after the processing of S507, the sub CPU 102 terminates the BB operation wait_Bns state setting processing, and also terminates the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 96) or the BB inter-flag_Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 98).

[BB_Bns state setting process]
Next, the in-BB_Bns state setting process performed in S468 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BARJAC rush flag" is in the on state (S511). The "BARJAC inrush flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the "JAC in progress" in the pseudo BB state is determined. The "BARJAC rush flag" has a predetermined symbol combination (in the present embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" is an effective line. It is turned on when it is stopped and displayed.

In S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (NO in S511), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S511 that the BARJAC rush flag is in the ON state (YES in S511), the sub CPU 102 turns the BARJAC rush flag in the OFF state (S512). Next, the sub CPU 102 transits the pseudo BB state to "JAC in progress" (S513).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than “0” (S514). In S514, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB guaranteed JAC number is not larger than “0” (NO in S514), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process. (See FIG. 96) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S514 that the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than "0" (YES in S514), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the BB guaranteed JAC number (S515). Then, after the processing of S515, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_Bns state setting processing and also the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 96).

[JAC_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the JAC_Bns state setting process performed in S470 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of JAC Bell-navi is “0” (S521). In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC Bell-navi is not “0” (NO determination in S521), the sub CPU 102 ends the JAC_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 96). See also).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S521 that the JAC Bell-navi count is “0” (YES in S521), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BB guaranteed JAC count is greater than “0”. Yes (S522).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S522 that the BB guaranteed JAC number is not larger than "0" (NO in S522), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "ChaBB in progress" (S523). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S522 that the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than "0" (YES in S522), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in BB" (S524). ..

After the processing of S523 or S524, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value "5" to the value of the JAC Bell-navi frequency (S525). Then, after the processing of S525, the sub CPU 102 ends the JAC_Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[During ChaBB_Bns state setting process]
Next, the Cha-BB_Bns state setting process performed in S472 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB game counter is less than "0" (S531).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the BB game counter is not less than "0" (NO in S531), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S533 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the BB game counter is less than "0" (YES in S531), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to "none" (S532). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the normal state.

After the process of S532 or when the determination of S531 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC rush flag is in the on state (S533). In S533, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (NO in S533), the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaBB during_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S533 that the BARJAC rush flag is in the on state (YES in S533), the sub CPU 102 turns the BARJAC rush flag in the off state (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "during ChaJAC" (S535).

Then, after the processing of S535, the sub CPU 102 finishes the ChaBB_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[ChaJAC_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the ChaJAC_Bns state setting process performed in S474 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of JAC Bell-navi is “0” (S541). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S541 that the JAC Bell-navi count is not "0" (NO in S541), the sub CPU 102 terminates the ChaJAC_Bns state setting process and also performs the Bns state setting process (Fig. 96). See also).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S541 that the JAC bell navigation count is "0" (YES in S541), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0". It is determined (S542).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S542 that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than "0" (NO in S542), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "none" (S543). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the AT state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S542 that the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0" (YES in S542), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "ChaBB in progress" (S544). ).

After the processing of S543 or S544, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of the JAC Bell-navi frequency (S545). Then, after the processing of S545, the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaJAC_Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[General_Game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the general medium_game start time process performed in S345 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is larger than “0” (S551).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S551 that the value of the cycle counter is not larger than "0" (NO in S551), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S553 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S551 that the value of the cycle counter is larger than "0" (YES in S551), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the cycle counter (S552).

After the processing of S552 or when the determination of S551 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information MAP data is "0" (S553). In the present embodiment, as described above, the race information MAP data (“1” to “10”) of four race destinations (first race to fifth race) is stored in advance at the start of the normal game set, respectively, in five storages. Although the area is set in the area, the race information MAP data of the end race is erased each time one race effect is finished, and one piece of the race information MAP data of the next set or later is stored in the head side storage area It is shifted and stored. At this time, "0" is stored as race information MAP data in the empty storage area at the end. Therefore, in the processing of S553, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information data in the storage area to be referred to is empty.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S553 that the race information MAP data is “0” (YES in S553), the sub CPU 102 performs the race information lottery process described in FIG. 86 (S554). That is, when the information regarding the content of the race effect of the current set (type of teammate character to be a race victory target (candidate), race win rate data of the teammate character) is not set, the game of the normal game of the current set is performed. At the start of the period, information regarding the content of the race effect is randomly determined. At this time, information about the content of the race effect from the current set to the fourth set ahead (first race to fifth race) is determined. Then, after the processing of S554, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S569 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S553 that the race information MAP data is not "0" (NO in S553), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (previous) is "in race". Is determined (S555). In S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (previous time) is not "in race" (NO determination in S555), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S569 described below.

On the other hand, in S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (previous time) is “during race” (when S555 is YES), the sub CPU 102 satisfies the re-lottery condition of the race starter MAP. It is determined whether or not there is (S556). In the present embodiment, the re-lottery condition of the race entrant MAP is that the number of consecutive losses in the race (the value of the consecutive loss counter in the race) is “5”.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S556 that the re-lottery condition of the race entrant MAP is not satisfied (NO in S556), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S559 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S556 that the re-lottery conditions for the race runners MAP are satisfied (YES in S556), the sub CPU 102 determines that the race runners MAP lottery table (see FIG. 33). With reference to, the race entrant MAP lottery process is performed (S557). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the lottery result of the race starter MAP lottery process (race information MAP number) in the "race starter MAP" (S558).

After the processing of S558 or when the determination of S556 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 34), and based on the value of the "race racer MAP" (race information MAP number). The types (target tables A to J) of the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 35) corresponding to the race information MAP data are determined (S559). In this process, the "target table" (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data up to the fourth race (first race to fifth race) based on the set value of the race starter MAP (race information MAP). Any one of A to J) is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the "target table" of the determined first race to the fifth race (S560).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the lottery process of the race victory target (candidate) person from the first race to the fifth race based on the "target table" from the first race to the fifth race set in S560 ( S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to “race winner” (S562). By this process, the race winners from the 1st race to the 5th race (any one of "male A", "male B", "female A", "tengu", "kappa" and "male A/male B" Or) is set as the "race winner".

Next, the sub CPU 102 checks the race win rate data of the current set (S563).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "race information data" is "0" (S564). The “race information data” is race win rate data, and in the processing of S564, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race win rate data of the current set is set.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S564 that the race information data is not “0” (NO in S564), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S569 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S564 that the race information data is "0" (YES in S564), the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 36) to determine the race. The winning percentage MAP lottery process is performed (S565). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 defines the race win rate MAP that defines the race win rate data of the "race winner" (race winner) set in S562 based on the current set value (one of 1 to 6). To decide.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S566).

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires race win rate data corresponding to the set "race win rate map" by referring to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 37) (S567). In this process, as shown in FIG. 37, only the race win rate data of the race of the current set (first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data of the second and subsequent races may be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S567 (S568).

After the processing of S554 or S568, or when the determination of S555 or S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing (S569). The details of the pseudo BB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs cycle shortening related processing (S570). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle reduction lottery table (see FIG. 46 and FIG. 47) and performs cycle reduction lottery based on the data of the “winning combination history”.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “10” or more and the “race generation flag” is in the off state (S571).

In S571, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S571 is not satisfied (when S571 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines that the cycle reduction lottery result determined in S570 is “Ojuku point”. The number of corresponding shortened games is added (S572).

After the processing of S572, the sub CPU 102 refers to a race win expectation degree lottery table (not shown) and performs the race win expectation degree data up lottery (S573). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery as the race win rate data (S574). Then, after the processing of S574, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S571, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S571 is satisfied (YES in S571), the sub CPU 102 determines the lottery result of the cycle reduction lottery determined in S570 from the value of the cycle counter (shortening). The number of games) is subtracted, and the calculation result is set to the value of the cycle counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than “10” (S575).

In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is not less than “10” (NO in S575), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start time process and executes the process. Then, the process proceeds to S356 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than “10” (YES in S575), the sub CPU 102 determines that the surplus amount corresponding to the calculation (subtraction) result. The number of shortened games of is added to "Oyado Point" (S576). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "10" to the value of the cycle counter (S577). After the processing of S577, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in S570 of the general medium_game start time process of the present embodiment, the lottery for shortening the game period of the normal game is performed, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (normal game shortening means, first normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit games in the normal game in the normal game. In addition, in S576 of the general medium_game start processing, if the value obtained by subtracting the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery of the normal game from the number of remaining unit games of the normal game is less than 10 games, the subtraction result Is stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (surplus game number stocking unit) for stocking the subtraction result as the number of shortened games for the surplus when the subtraction result is less than 10 games.

[Pseudo BB lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the pseudo BB lottery processing performed in S569 in the flowchart of the general medium_game start processing (see FIGS. 104 and 105) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (S581). In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is equal to or greater than “0” (YES in S581), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and the process is general medium_game. The process proceeds to S570 of the start processing (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S581 that the value of the BB precursor counter is not equal to or greater than "0" (NO in S581), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is "general". It is determined whether or not (S582).

In S582, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general" (NO in S582), the sub CPU 102 determines the pseudo BB lottery (AT in progress/AT in preparation/during race) table. With reference to FIG. 44, the pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S583). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S582 that the game state (current) is "general medium" (when S582 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table (see FIG. 43). ), the pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S584).

After the processing of S583 or S584, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB lottery is won (S585). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S585 that the pseudo BB lottery has not been won (in the case of NO determination in S585), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and the process is a general medium_game start process (FIG. 104). And FIG. 105) (S570).

On the other hand, in S585, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo BB lottery.
(If YES in S585), the sub CPU 102 sets "at BB winning" in the pseudo BB state (S586). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB omen lottery table (see FIG. 45) and performs the pseudo BB omen lottery process based on the internal winning combination (S587).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter (S588). Then, after the processing of S588, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery processing, and moves the processing to S570 of general medium_game start processing (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

As described above, the pseudo BB lottery process of this embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means (special game determination means) for determining execution of the pseudo BB game.

[General BB_Game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the general BB_game start time process performed in S347 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB rush determination process (at the start of a game) (S591). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages ON/OFF of a “BB rush check flag” provided for checking the occurrence of an event called “command spill” due to a goto act (misconduct). The details of the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game) (S592). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages ON/OFF of a “BARJAC rush check flag” provided for checking the occurrence of “command spill”. The details of the BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BB counter management processing (S593). The details of the BB counter management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S594).

In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (YES in S594), the sub CPU 102 refers to a not-shown race winning/winning rate lottery table, and wins the winning percentage after winning the race. Processing is performed (S595). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the lottery process after winning the race to increase the winning percentage in the race winning percentage data (S596). Then, after the processing of S596, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S604 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S594 that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (NO in S594), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “1” or more. (S597). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S597 that the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than "1" (NO determination in S597), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S604 described below.

On the other hand, in S597, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is “1” or more (YES in S597), the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table (see FIG. 48). Then, the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery process is performed based on the “winning combination history” (S598). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of shortened games determined by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process from the current value of the cycle counter, and sets the calculation result in the cycle counter (S599).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after the arithmetic processing of S599 is “0” or less (S600). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S600 that the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or less than "0" (NO in S600), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S604 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S600 that the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than "0" (YES in S600), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S601). By this processing, after the pseudo BB game ends, the race effect of the transition effect game is started.

Next, the number of surplus shortened games (absolute value of the calculation result) corresponding to the value of the calculation result of S599 is added to the "Ojuku point" (S602). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the cycle counter (S603). Then, after the processing of S603, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S604 described later.

After the processing of S596 or S603, or when the determination of S597 or S600 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to the "push-order bell". (S604). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S605). Then, after the processing of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in S598 of the general BB_game start time process of the present embodiment, the game period reduction lottery of the normal game (pseudo BB period reduction lottery) is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (second normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the pseudo BB game.

[BB rush determination process (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BB rush determination processing (at the start of the game) performed in S591 in the flowchart of the general BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB entry check flag (S611). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (current) is "in race" (S612).

In S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not "race in progress" (NO in S612), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "BB operation waiting" or not. It is determined (S613). In S613, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “waiting for BB operation” (NO in S613), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game), and the process is generally performed. The process moves to S592 of the middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S613 that the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation” (YES in S613), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1” to “normal lip”. 8” is determined (S614).

In S614, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of "normal rep 1" to "normal rep 8" (NO in S614), the sub CPU 102 determines the BB rush judgment process (game start). Time) is finished, and the process proceeds to S592 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S614 that the internal winning combination is one of the "normal rep 1" to the "normal rep 8" (in the case of YES determination in S614), the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is set. Is turned on (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination processing (at the time of starting the game), and moves the processing to S592 of the general middle BB_game starting processing (see FIG. 107).

Here, again returning to the processing of S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S612 that the sub game state is "during race" (when YES is determined in S612), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo BB state to " It is determined whether or not it is "between BB flags" (S616). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S616 that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" (NO in S616), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game), and the process is generally performed. The process moves to S592 of the middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S616 that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” (YES in S616), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 2” or “normal lip”. It is determined whether it is "4" (S617).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S617 that the internal winning combination is not "normal rep 2" or "normal rep 4" (NO in S617), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush judgment process (at the start of the game). The process is ended, and the process proceeds to S592 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S617 that the internal winning combination is "normal rep 2" or "normal rep 4" (YES in S617), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB rush check flag. (S618). Then, after the processing of S618, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination processing (at the start of the game), and moves the processing to S592 of the general middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107).

[BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the BBJAC shift determination processing (at the start of the game) performed in S592 in the flowchart of the general BB_game start time processing (see FIG. 107) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC rush check flag is on (S621). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S621 that the BARJAC rush check flag is not in the on state (NO in S621), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S625 described below.

On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the ON state (YES in S621), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress”. Yes (S622). In S622, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB in progress” (NO in S622), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S625 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S622 that the pseudo BB state is "BB in progress" (YES in S622), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC rush flag (S623). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB_Bns state setting process described in FIG. 100 (S624). Then, after the processing of S624, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S625 described later.

After the processing of S624 or when the determination of S621 or S622 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC rush check flag (S625).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “during BB” or “during ChaBB” (S626). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S626 that the pseudo BB state is not "BB in progress" or "ChaBB in progress" (NO in S626), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game). , The process proceeds to S593 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S626 that the pseudo BB state is "BB in progress" or "ChaBB in progress" (YES in S626), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is "normal lip 1". It is determined whether or not one of "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (S627).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S627 that the internal winning combination is not one of the "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" and the "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (in the case of NO determination in S627), the sub CPU The CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game), and moves the process to S593 of the general BB_game start time process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S627 that the internal winning combination is any one of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (in the case of YES determination in S627) ), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC inrush check flag (S628). Then, after the processing of S628, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination processing (at the start of the game), and moves the processing to S593 of the general BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107).

[BB counter management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the BB counter management processing performed in S593 in the flowchart of the general BB_game start time processing (see FIG. 107) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (S631). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S631 that the pseudo BB state is not "ChaBB in progress" (NO in S631), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S634 described below.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines in S631 that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (YES in S631), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is larger than “0”. Is determined (S632).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S632 that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than "0" (NO in S632), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S634 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S632 that the value of the BB game counter is greater than "0" (YES in S632), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the BB game counter (S633). ). Then, after the processing of S633, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S634 described later.

After the processing of S633 or when the determination of S631 or S632 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “during JAC” or “during ChaJAC” (S634).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S634 that the pseudo BB state is not "JAC in progress" or "ChaJAC in progress" (NO in S634), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and performs the process in general. The process proceeds to S594 of the BB_game start process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S634 that the pseudo BB state is “JAC in progress” or “ChaJAC in progress” (YES in S634), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell”. It is determined whether or not (any one of the winning numbers “9” to “12”) (S635).

In S635, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not the “push order bell” (in the case of NO determination in S635), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and the process is general BB_ game start time. The process moves to S594 of the process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is the “push order bell” (when the determination in S635 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the JAC bell navigation frequency is greater than “0”. It is determined (S636).

In S636, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not greater than “0” (NO in S636), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and the process is in the middle BB_ game start time. The process moves to S594 of the process (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S636 that the number of JAC bell navigations is larger than "0" (YES in S636), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of JAC bell navigations (S637). Then, after the processing of S637, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management processing, and moves the processing to S594 of the general medium BB_game start time processing (see FIG. 107).

[Processing during race_start of game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the during-race_game start time process performed in S349 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described in FIG. 108 (S641). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the number of racing games (S642).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is "1" (S643). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S643 that the number of racing games is not "1" (NO in S643), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S650 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S643 that the number of racing games is “1” (YES in S643), the sub CPU 102 is set by referring to the race result lottery table (see FIG. 40). Race result lottery processing is performed based on the race win rate data (S644). In this processing, the result (winning winning/non-winning) of the race effect performed in the transition effect game is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, the race result (winning/non-winning of the AT game) is randomly determined in the first game (starting game) of the race effect.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the bell payout number counter during the cycle (S645). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race has been won by the race result lottery (whether or not the AT has been won) (S646).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S646 that the race has been won (YES in S646), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S647). Then, after the processing of S647, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S651 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S646 that the race has not been won (NO in S646), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the consecutive race loss counter is "9" or more. (S648).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S648 that the value of the consecutive race loss counter is "9" or more (YES in S648), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S649). That is, when the number of consecutive losses in the race reaches “10” (ceiling), the race victory flag is turned on, and the AT wins. Then, after the processing of S649, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S651 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S648 that the value of the race consecutive loss counter is not "9" or more (when NO in S648), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the race consecutive loss counter (S650). ). Then, after the processing of S650, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S651 described later.

After the processing of S647, S649, or S650, or when the determination of S643 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described in FIG. 106 (S651). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “at the time of winning the BB” (S652).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S652 that the pseudo BB state is not "at the time of winning the BB" (NO in S652), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S654 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S652 that the pseudo BB state is “at the time of winning the BB” (YES in S652), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S653).

After the processing of S653 or when the determination of S652 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (S654). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S654 that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (NO determination in S654), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S657 described below.

On the other hand, in S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (YES determination in S654), the sub CPU 102 determines that the direct addition lottery table (FIG. 49). Refer to), based on the “winning combination history”, the additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly additional lottery process) is performed (S655). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the directly-on random determination process (the number of additional AT games) to the number of remaining AT games (S656).

After the processing of S656 or when the determination of S654 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to the "push-order bell" (S657). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S658). Then, after the processing of S658, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during race_game start time, and moves the processing to S356 of start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

Note that, as described above, AT lottery is performed in S644 of the process during race_game start time of this embodiment, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (notifying game determination unit) that determines whether or not to perform the AT game.

[AT preparing_processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the AT preparation_game start time process performed in S351 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described in FIG. 106 (S661). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) (S662).

In S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (previous) (YES in S662), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S675 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S662 that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (previous) (NO in S662), the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is the "male A". It is determined whether or not it is "(S663).

In S663, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is the “male A” (YES in S663), the sub CPU 102 performs the male A victory_game start time process (S664). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of AT games (the number of basic stay games in AT state) according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the "man A" wins. In addition, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S664, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S663 that the "race winner" is not "male A" (NO in S663), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is "male B". It is determined whether or not (S665).

In S665, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is the “male B” (YES in S665), the sub CPU 102 performs the male B winning_game start time process (S666). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the "man B" wins. In addition, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S666, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S665 that the "race winner" is not "male B" (NO determination in S665), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is "woman A". It is determined whether or not (S667).

In S667, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is the "woman A" (YES in S667), the sub CPU 102 performs the female A victory_game start time process (S668). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the "woman A" wins. In addition, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S668, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S667 that the "race winner" is not "woman A" (NO in S667), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is "kappa". It is determined (S669).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S669 that the "race winner" is the "Kappa" (YES in S669), the sub CPU 102 performs the Kappa victory_game start time process (S670). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" is won. The details of the process of winning the kappa_starting the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. Then, after the processing of S670, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S669 that the "race winner" is not the "kappa" (NO in S669), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is the "tengu". Is determined (S671).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S671 that the "race winner" is the "tengu" (YES in S671), the sub CPU 102 performs the tengu win_game start time process (S672). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the above-mentioned "Tengu" wins. In addition, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S672, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S671 that the "race winner" is not the "tengu" (NO in S671), the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male A/male B". It is determined whether there is any (S673). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S673 that the "race winner" is not "male A/male B" (NO in S673), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S675 described below.

On the other hand, in S673, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male A/male B" (YES in S673), the sub CPU 102 determines that male A/male B is winning_game. Processing at the start is performed (S674). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the above-mentioned "man A/man B" wins. In addition, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S674, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

After the processing of S664, S666, S668, S670, S672 or S674, if S662 is YES or if S673 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), The small order winning push order navigation lottery process is performed (S675). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S676). After the processing of S676, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

[Kappa Victory_Game Start Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the kappa victory time_game start time process performed in S670 in the AT preparation_game start time process (see FIG. 112) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the kappa sushi MAP data (see FIG. 54) of the current game is “0” (whether or not the kappa sushi MAP is not set) (S681).

In S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi MAP data is not “0” (NO in S681), the sub CPU 102 moves the kappa sushi MAP data of the next game and thereafter toward the head storage area. One is moved (S682). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 makes one plate of the second to the tenth plate of Kappa sushi MAP data (whether any of “1” to “8” is stored or is empty (“0”)). The storage areas for the Kappa sushi MAP data for the 9th to 9th dishes are respectively shifted to empty the storage area for the 10th dish for DOSushi MAP data (“0” is stored). Then, after the process of S682, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S687 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S681 that the kappa sushi MAP data is “0” (YES in S681), the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (FIG. 50). (See FIG. 53), the kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed (S683). By this processing, the number of "Kappa Sushi MAP" is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 54), and based on the “Kappa sushi MAP” number determined in S683, the first to tenth kappa sushi MAP data ( (Sushi story data) is acquired (S684).

After the processing of S684, the sub CPU 102 sets the kappa sushi MAP data for the first to tenth dishes acquired in S684 (S685). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores the kappa sushi MAP data for the first to tenth plates defined in the kappa sushi MAP in the corresponding storage area. Next, the sub CPU 685 sets an initial value "5" in the kappa end counter (S686).

After the processing of S682 or S686, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sixth plate of Kappa sushi MAP data is empty (“0”) (S687). In S687, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data of the sixth plate is not empty (NO in S687), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S691 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S687 that the sixth dish Kappa sushi MAP data is empty (YES in S687), the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins). The table (see FIGS. 50 to 53) is referred to, and the kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed based on the current kappa sushi MAP number (S688). By this processing, the number of "Kappa Sushi MAP" set on the sixth plate is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 54), and acquires 10 plates of kappa sushi MAP data based on the “Kappa sushi MAP” number determined in S688 (S689). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the kappa sushi MAP data for 10 plates defined in the kappa sushi MAP acquired in S689 in the empty storage area of the sixth and subsequent plates (S690).

After the processing of S690 or when the determination of S687 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the "group 1 combination" (S691). The "group 1 winning combination" is an internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers "9" to "14", and is "213 bell 1" to "213 bell 8", "231 bell 1" to "231". Bell 8", "312 Bell 1" to "312 Bell 8", "321 Bell 1" to "321 Bell 8", "1xx 3 Bells", "2xx 3 Bells" and "3xx 3 Bells" The winning role.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S691 that the internal winning combination is not the "group 1 combination" (NO in S691), the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 56), Based on the internal winning combination, the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process is performed (S692).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for kappa sushi data conversion has been won (S693). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S693 that the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery has not been won (in the case of NO determination in S693), the sub CPU 102 ends the kappa victory_game start process and prepares for AT preparation. The process moves to S675 in the middle_game start process (see FIG. 112).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S693 that the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery has been won (when S693 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (see FIGS. 57 to 61). With reference to this, the conversion lottery process of the sushi material (kappa sushi MAP data) for 5 dishes (2nd to 6th dishes) after the next game is performed (S694).

Next, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second to sixth plates based on the lottery result of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process of S694 (S695). Then, after the processing of S695, the sub CPU 102 ends the Kappa victory_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S675 of AT preparing_game start time processing (see FIG. 112).

Here, returning to the process of S691 again, in S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is the “group 1 combination” (when YES is determined in S691), the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of kappa games is The acquired lottery table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the number of acquired AT games is randomly determined based on the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) (S696). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of acquired AT games to the number of currently acquired AT games (S697).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sushi item at the time of acquiring the AT game number is any of “squid”, “salmon” and “tuna” (Kappa sushi MAP data is “1”, “4” and “6”). It is determined whether or not any of the above) (S698). In S698, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi item is not one of “squid”, “salmon” and “tuna” (when S698 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S700 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S698 that the sushi material is any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (when S698 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the value of the kappa end counter. Is subtracted by "1" (S699).

After the processing of S699 or when the determination of S698 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (S700).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S700 that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than "0" (NO in S700), the sub CPU 102 sets the AT game number after the addition calculation in S697 to "AT start game number". Is set as "" (S701). After the processing of S701, the sub CPU 701 ends the Kappa victory_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S675 of AT preparing_game start time processing (see FIG. 112).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S700 that the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (YES in S700), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag (S702). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “20 times” in the “BET return chance” (S703).

By the process of S703, as the lottery for restoring the AT start game number determination game, which is performed at the end of the process when the kappa wins_the game starts, the lottery can be performed by pressing the BET button 20 times (recovering continuous hits). If the rehabilitation lottery is won by pressing the BET button 20 times, the Kappa victory time_game start time process (AT start game number acquisition process) is performed again.

Then, after the processing of S703, the sub CPU 102 ends the Kappa victory_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S675 of AT preparing_game start time processing (see FIG. 112).

Although not shown in FIG. 113, when the sushi item is “Kappa Maki” in the lottery process of the number of acquired AT games in S696 (when the Kappa Sushi MAP data is “3”), “LIFE UP”. Wins. In this case, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the kappa end counter instead of the series of processes from the AT game number addition process (S697) to the kappa end counter subtraction process (S699). Done.

As described above, in S684 of the Kappa victory_game start process of the present embodiment, sushi items (Kappa Sushi MA data) for 10 plates (10 games) sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are determined. This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (game information determination means) for determining game information for 10 games sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the Kappa sushi production. Further, in S695 of the process when the Kappa wins_game starts, if the internal winning combination is other than "Group winning combination 1" (for example, "Loss") and the winning of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery is successful, the second to sixth plates The kappa sushi MAP data (sushi news item) is rewritten, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (game information changing unit) that changes the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second and subsequent dishes when the internal winning combination is a loss. Further, in S697 of the process when the Kappa wins_game start time, if the internal winning combination is the “group winning combination 1” (regular internal winning combination), the number of acquired AT games is added to the number of currently acquired AT games. This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (unit game number addition unit) for adding the acquired AT game number to the currently acquired AT game number.

In addition, in S697 to S699 of the process when the Kappa victory is started, if the internal winning combination is "group combination 1", the value of the kappa end counter is updated according to the sushi story (Kappa Sushi MA data) (" 1" subtraction or "1" addition), and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (end information updating unit) that updates the value of the kappa end counter. Further, in S701 of the game at the time of winning the kappa _ game start, if the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (when the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the kappa ends), it is acquired at that time. The total number of AT games in play is set as the number of AT start games, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 sets the total number of AT games acquired by the end of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the kappa as the AT start game number (basic unit game number). It also serves as a determining means. Further, in S703 of the game when starting Kappa _ game start, at the end of the AT starting game number determining game, a revival lottery of the AT starting game number determining game when Kappa winning is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. It That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means (returning lottery means) for performing a recovery lottery of the AT start game number determination game when the kappa wins at the end of the game period of the AT start game number determination game when the kappa wins. Also doubles.

[AT_game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the AT_game start time process performed in S353 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remaining AT game number is larger than “0” (S711).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S711 that the number of remaining AT games is not larger than "0" (NO in S711), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S713 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S711 that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (YES in S711), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining AT games (S712).

After the processing of S712 or when the determination of S711 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing". Yes (S713). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S713 that the determination condition of S713 is not satisfied (NO in S713), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S718 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S713 that the determination condition of S713 is satisfied (YES in S713), the sub CPU 102 refers to the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 35) to determine the race winning target ( A lottery process for candidates is performed (S714). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target lottery process to “race winner” (S715).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42) and performs the winning percentage lottery process (post-AT race winning percentage lottery process) of the race performed in the transition effect game after AT (( S716). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S716 in the race win rate data (S717).

After the process of S717 or when the determination of S713 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described in FIG. 106 (S718). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-applied lottery table (see FIG. 49) and performs the additional lottery process (directly-applied lottery process) on the number of AT games (S719). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the directly-on lottery process (the number of additional AT games) to the number of remaining AT games (S720).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing for the small winning combination relating to the “push-order bell” (S721). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S722).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) and the win is performed in the push order navigation lottery process (S723).

In S723, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S723 is not satisfied (NO in S723), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S723 that the determination condition of S723 is satisfied (YES in S723), the sub CPU 102 determines the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total difference). ) Is updated (S724). In this update process, the sub CPU 102 makes a net increase of the current number of medals by the difference number of medals (payout number-number multiplied) obtained when the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) won in the current game is won. Add to the number.

After the processing of S724 or when the determination of S723 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (S725). By the process of S725, it is determined whether the AT game is also continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S725 shows the first example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S725, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (YES in S725), that is, when the AT game is also continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 is in the game state ( Next time) is set to the game state (current) (S726). Then, after the processing of S726, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In S725, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not larger than “0” (NO in S725), that is, when the AT game is finished in the current game, the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT game is in progress. It is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the period (total sum of difference) is greater than or equal to the specified number (S727).

The specified number is preset according to the total number of AT games (number of games) in the AT game period. In the present embodiment, for example, the prescribed number is set to 150 when the total number of AT games (number of games) in the AT game period is 50 games. It should be noted that a plurality of specified numbers may be provided according to the present embodiment. The specified number may be determined for each AT game set, or may be determined at the start of the AT game. Further, the specified number may be determined according to the initial AT game number.

In S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total difference) is not more than the specified number (NO in S727), the sub CPU 102 will be described later. The process of S729 is performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S727 that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total difference) is equal to or more than the specified number (YES in S727), the sub CPU 102 determines , Rewrite the race win rate to 100% (S728). That is, the next AT operation is determined.

After the processing of S728 or when the determination of S727 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "in race" to the game state (next time) (S729). After the processing of S729, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in the AT_game starting process of the present embodiment, the number of AT games is added to the lottery, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (notifying game adding unit, first notifying game adding unit) for determining the number of additions (the number of additions) of the unit game number of the AT game in the AT game.

[BB during AT_game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the during-AT BB_game start time process performed in S355 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 108 (S731). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game) described in FIG. 109 (S732). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described in FIG. 110 (S733).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-on lottery table (see FIG. 49) and performs an additional lottery process (directly-once lottery process) for the number of AT games (S734). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the directly-on-lottery processing (the number of additional AT games) to the number of remaining AT games (S735).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to the “push-order bell” (S736). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S737). Then, after the processing of S737, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT BB_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in the AT BB_game start time processing of the present embodiment, the lottery is performed in addition to the number of AT games, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (second notification game addition means) for determining the number of additions of the unit game number of the AT game in the pseudo BB game.

[Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the game state setting processing performed in S357 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general” (S741).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the gaming state (current) is "general medium" (YES in S741), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium_gaming state setting process (S742). The details of the general medium_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later. Then, after the processing of S742, the sub CPU 102 terminates the game state setting processing and also terminates the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not "general medium" (when S741 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 has the game state (current) "general medium BB". It is determined whether or not (S743).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S743 that the gaming state (current) is "general medium BB" (YES in S743), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_gaming state setting process (S744). The details of the general BB_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. Then, after the processing of S744, the sub CPU 102 terminates the game state setting processing and also terminates the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S743 that the gaming state (current) is not "general BB" (NO in S743), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "race". It is determined whether or not (S745).

In S745, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "in race" (YES in S745), the sub CPU 102 performs in-race_gaming state setting processing (S746). The details of the in-race_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S746, the sub CPU 102 terminates the game state setting processing and also terminates the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S745, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race" (when NO in S745), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "AT preparing". It is determined whether or not (S747).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S747 that the gaming state (current) is "AT preparing" (YES in S747), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparing_gaming state setting processing (S748). .. The details of the AT preparing_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Then, after the processing of S748, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing and the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S747 that the gaming state (current) is not "AT preparing" (NO in S747), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT BB". It is determined whether there is any (S749).

In S749, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT BB" (YES in S749), the sub CPU 102 performs AT BB_gaming state setting process (S750). The details of the BB_game state setting process during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later. Then, after the processing of S750, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing and also the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S749, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT BB" (NO in S749), the sub CPU 102 terminates the game state setting process and also performs the start command reception process. (See FIG. 87) also ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 116, in the series of repeated processing of the above-described sub game state determination processing and game state setting processing during the game state setting processing, in actuality, the sub game state is “in W chance”. Whether or not there is a determination process and a "W chance" game state setting process, and whether or not the sub gaming state is "AT" and "AT" game state setting process are also performed. ..

[General/Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the general medium_game state setting process performed in S742 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “0” (S761).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S761 that the value of the cycle counter is not "0" (NO in S761), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S763 described below. On the other hand, in S761, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is “0” (YES in S761), the sub CPU 102 sets “in race” as the gaming state (next time) ( S762).

After the processing of S762 or when the determination of S761 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (S763). In S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (NO in S763), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process. (See FIG. 116) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S763 that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (YES in S763), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (next time) is “during race”. It is determined whether or not (S764).

In S764, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is not "race" (when NO in S764), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S766 described below. On the other hand, in S764, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is "race in progress" (YES in S764), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S765).

After the processing of S765 or when the determination of S764 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (S766). In S766, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the on state (NO in S766), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S768 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S766 that the race occurrence flag is in the on state (YES in S766), the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the cycle counter (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination of S766 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "general BB" in the game state (next time) (S768). Then, after the processing of S768, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game state setting process and the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[General BB_game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the general BB_gaming state setting process performed in S744 in the flowchart of the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is “0” (S771). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S771 that the value of the BB game counter is not “0” (NO in S771), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general BB_gaming state setting process and simultaneously ends the gaming state setting process. (See FIG. 116) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S771 that the value of the BB game counter is “0” (YES in S771), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC” and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of bell navigations is larger than "0" (S772). In S772, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S772 is satisfied (YES in S772), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium BB_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 116). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S772 that the determination condition of S772 is not satisfied (NO in S772), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (S773). ..

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S773 that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (NO in S773), the sub CPU 102 sets "general medium" in the gaming state (next time) (S774). Then, after the processing of S774, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S773 that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (YES in S773), the sub CPU 102 sets "in race" to the gaming state (next time) (S775). .. Then, after the processing of S775, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_gaming state setting processing and also ends the gaming state setting processing (see FIG. 116).

[During race_game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the in-race_game state setting process performed in S746 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is the tenth game (S781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of racing games is not the tenth game (NO in S781), the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (Fig. (See 116) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S781 that the number of racing games is the tenth game (YES in S781), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is in the ON state ( S782).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S782 that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (NO in S782), the sub CPU 102 sets "general medium" in the gaming state (next time) (S783). Then, after the processing of S783, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S782 that the race victory flag is in the ON state (YES in S782), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0". Yes (S784).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S784 that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (NO in S784), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparing" in the game state (next time) (S785). ). Then, after the processing of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S784 that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (YES in S784), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT BB” in the gaming state (next time). Yes (S786). Then, after the processing of S786, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[AT preparing_game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the AT preparing_game state setting process performed in S748 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT rush flag is on (S791). In S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT rush flag is not in the ON state (NO in S791), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (Fig. (See 116) also ends.

On the other hand, in S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT rush flag is in the on state (YES in S791), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in progress" to the game state (next time) (S792). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (S793).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S793 that the value of the BB precursor counter is not equal to or greater than "0" (NO in S793), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S796 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S793 that the value of the BB precursor counter is equal to or greater than "0" (YES in S793), the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the value of the BB precursor counter. (S794). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "BB in AT" in the game state (next time) (S795).

After the processing of S795 or when the determination of S793 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the "game number lottery end flag" (S796). The “game number lottery end flag” is a flag indicating whether or not to end the AT start game number determination game. Then, after the processing of S796, the sub CPU 102 finishes the AT preparing_game state setting process and also finishes the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[BB_game state setting process during AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the BB_game state setting process during AT in S750 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is "0" (S801). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S801 that the value of the BB game counter is not "0" (NO in S801), the sub CPU 102 terminates the AT BB_gaming state setting process and simultaneously ends the gaming state setting process. (See FIG. 116) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S801 that the value of the BB game counter is "0" (YES in S801), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "ChaJAC" and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of Bernavi is larger than "0" (S802). In S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S802 is satisfied (YES in S802), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT BB_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 116). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S802 that the determination condition of S802 is not satisfied (NO in S802), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is on (S803). ..

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S803 that the race victory flag is in the ON state (YES in S803), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparing" in the gaming state (next time) (S804). Then, after the processing of S804, the sub CPU 102 finishes the BB_game state setting process during AT and the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) as well.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S803 that the race victory flag is not in the on state (NO in S803), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "additional challenge flag" is in the on state ( S805). The "additional challenge flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the game in the additional challenge state is executed, and although not shown, it is set in the AT preparation_game state setting process.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S805 that the additional challenge flag is in the on state (YES in S805), the sub CPU 102 sets "adding challenge in progress" to the gaming state (next time) (S806). Then, after the processing of S806, the sub CPU 102 finishes the BB_game state setting process during AT and also finishes the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S805 that the additional challenge flag is not in the ON state (NO in S805), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in progress" to the gaming state (next time) (S807). Then, after the processing of S807, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT and the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) as well.

[Process when winning command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the winning operation command reception process performed in S302 in the flow chart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a "general medium BB" winning state (hereinafter, referred to as "general medium BB_winning period") (S811).

In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "general medium BB_at the time of winning" (YES in S811), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_at the time of winning (S812). Details of the general BB_winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later. Then, after the processing of S812, the sub CPU 102 finishes the winning operation command reception time processing, and also finishes the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S811 that the sub game state is not "general medium BB_at the time of winning" (S811 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines when the sub game state is "general medium/small winning combination". It is determined whether or not (hereinafter, referred to as "general medium and small combination_at the time of winning") (S813).

In S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “at the time of general medium and small combination_winning” (YES in S813), the sub CPU 102 performs processing at the time of general medium/small winning combination_winning (S814). .. The details of the general small and medium winning combination_prize winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. After the processing of S814, the sub CPU 102 finishes the winning operation command reception time processing, and also finishes the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general medium/small winning combination_at the time of winning" (NO in S813), the sub CPU 102 determines when the sub game state is "during race". (Hereinafter, referred to as "during race_at winning") is determined (S815).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S815 that the sub game state is "during race_winning" (YES in S815), the sub CPU 102 performs in-race_winning processing (S816). The details of the in-race_winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later. Then, after the processing of S816, the sub CPU 102 ends the winning operation command reception process and also the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S815, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "during race_winning" (NO in S815), the sub CPU 102 determines when the sub game state is "AT BB". It is determined whether or not (hereinafter, referred to as “AT BB_at the time of winning”) (S817). In S817, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT BB_at the time of winning" (NO in S817), the sub CPU 102 terminates the winning operation command receiving process and determines the effect contents. The process (see FIG. 84) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S817 that the sub game state is "at BB during AT_win" (YES in S817), the sub CPU 102 performs BB during AT_win process (S818). .. The details of the BB_AT_at-winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S818, the sub CPU 102 finishes the winning operation command reception time processing, and also finishes the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

[General BB_winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the general BB_winning time process performed in S812 in the flowchart of the winning action command reception process (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs BB entry determination processing (at the time of winning) (S821). The details of the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BBJAC shift determination process (at the time of winning) (S822). The details of the BBJAC shift determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Then, after the processing of S822, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_winning time process and the winning operation command reception time process (see FIG. 122).

[BB rush determination process (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S821 in the flowchart of the process in normal BB_at the time of winning (see FIG. 123) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB entry check flag is on (S831). In S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is not on (when S831 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning), and the process is general BB_win The process proceeds to S822 of the time processing (see FIG. 123).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S831 that the BB rush check flag is in the on state (YES in S831), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB rush check flag in the off state (S832).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player presses the stop buttons in a predetermined order (whether or not the pressing order is correct) (S833). When the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1” or “normal lip 3”, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is “middle right/left”, the pressing order is correct. When the internal winning combination is “normal rep 2” or “normal rep 4”, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is “right center left”, the pressing order is correct. When the internal winning combination is “normal lip 5” or “normal lip 7”, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is “middle left/right”, the pressing order is correct. When the internal winning combination is “normal lip 6” or “normal lip 8”, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is “middle right left”, the pressing order is correct.

In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button pressing sequence by the player is not the predetermined sequence (NO in S833), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning), and the process The process proceeds to S822 of the general BB_winning process (see FIG. 123).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S833 that the player presses the stop buttons in a predetermined order (YES in S833), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB rush flag (S834). ). Then, after the processing of S834, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination processing (at the time of winning), and shifts the processing to S822 of the general middle BB_at the time of winning processing (see FIG. 123).

[BBJAC transfer determination processing (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the BBJAC shift determination processing (at the time of winning) performed in S822 in the flowchart of the general BB_at the time of winning (see FIG. 123) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the on state (S841). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S841 that the BARJAC rush check flag is not in the ON state (NO in S841), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S848 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S841 that the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the on state (YES in S841), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC inrush check flag (S842). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "BB in progress" (S843).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S843 that the pseudo BB state is "BB in progress" (YES in S843), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S847 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S843 that the pseudo BB state is not "BB in progress" (NO in S843), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "ChaBB in progress". Yes (S844).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S844 that the pseudo BB state is not "ChaBB in progress" (NO in S844), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S848 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S844 that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (YES in S844), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the display combination (winning combination) is “BAR Lip”. It is determined whether or not (S845). The winning combination “BAR Lip” corresponds to “Bell Lip 3” or “Bell Lip 4”.

In S845, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is “BAR REP” (YES in S845), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S847 described below. On the other hand, in S845, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is not "BAR Lip" (NO determination in S845), the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "AT BB". It is determined whether there is any (S846).

In S846, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is “AT BB” (YES in S846), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S847 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S846 that the gaming state (current) is not "AT BB" (NO in S846), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S848 described below.

When S843, S845, or S846 is YES, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC rush flag (S847).

After the processing of S847, or when S841, S844, or S846 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (S848). In S848, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S848), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination process (at the time of winning). , And the general medium BB_winning process (see FIG. 123) is also ended.

On the other hand, in S848, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (YES in S848), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BARJAC rush flag is in the ON state. Is determined (S849). In S849, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the on state (NO in S849), the sub CPU 102 finishes the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) and executes the process in the general middle BB_winning. The time processing (see FIG. 123) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S849 that the BARJAC rush flag is in the on state (YES in S849), the sub CPU 102 sets the game state (current) to the game state (next time) (S850). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the value of the BB game counter (S851). Then, after the processing of S851, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination processing (at the time of winning), and also ends the processing of the general BB_winning processing (see FIG. 123).

[General small and medium roles_Processing when winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the general small and medium winning combination_prize winning process performed in S814 of the flowchart of the prize actuation command receiving process (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a small winning combination relating to a bell is won (S861). In the present embodiment, the “small role related to the bell” is “213 bell” (“213 bell 1” to “213 bell 8”), “231 bell” (“231 bell 1” to “231 bell 8”). , "312 Bell" ("312 Bell 1" to "312 Bell 8"), "321 Bell" ("321 Bell 1" to "321 Bell 8"), "Left 3 Bells" ("1xx 3 Bells") , And “middle right 3 bells” (“2xx 3 bells”, “3xx 3 bells”).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S861 that the small winning combination relating to the bell is not won (in the case where S861 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general medium and small winning combination_prize winning process and the winning operation command receiving process. (See FIG. 122) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S861 that the small winning combination related to the bell is won (YES in S861), the sub CPU 102 adds the payout number to the bell payout number counter during the cycle (S862). .. After the processing of S862, the sub CPU 102 finishes the general small and medium winning combination_prize winning process as well as the winning actuation command receiving process (see FIG. 122).

[Processing during race_winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the in-race winning time process performed in S816 of the flowchart of the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB entry check flag is on (S871). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S871 that the BB entry check flag is not in the on state (NO in S871), the sub CPU 102 ends the race_winning time process and the winning action command reception process ( (See FIG. 122) also ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S871 that the BB rush check flag is in the on state (YES in S871), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB rush check flag in the off state (S872).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player presses the stop buttons in a predetermined order (whether or not the press order is correct) (S873).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S873 that the player has not pressed the stop buttons in a predetermined order (NO in S873), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag on (S874). After the processing of S874, the sub CPU 102 finishes the race_winning time process and the winning operation command reception time process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S873 that the player presses the stop buttons in a predetermined order (YES in S873), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB rush flag (S875). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "BB in AT" in the game state (next time) (S876). Then, after the processing of S876, the sub CPU 102 finishes the during-race_winning time process and also finishes the winning action command reception time process (see FIG. 122).

[BB_AT winning process]
Next, referring to FIG. 128, the in-AT BB_winning time process performed in S818 in the flowchart of the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) described with reference to FIG. 124 (S881). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC shift determination process (at the time of winning) described in FIG. 125 (S882). Then, after the processing of S882, the sub CPU 102 finishes the BB_AT winning process and the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 122).

<Various effects of the present invention>
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the following various effects can be obtained.

[Various effects obtained by playing games between 2MB flags]
In the present embodiment, as described above, the predetermined number of games (190) is set in the RT1 (high RT) gaming state in which the bonus “2MB” of winning and winning only in the two-player game is carried over, that is, in the 2MB flag state. Various games such as non-AT state games (normal games and transition effect games) having one cycle of a game) and AT state games of a specific number of games are performed. Then, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, it is suggested to play three cards, and as long as the player plays a game to play three cards according to the suggestion, the game can be played without winning the bonus "2MB". In addition, as long as the player plays the game with three cards in the state between the 2MB flags, the lottery table in which the bonus “2MB” is not established and the winning is not defined is referred to. Therefore, any stop operation of the bonus “2MB” is performed. It won't win.

Further, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game, "miss" or when a specific internal winning combination (small winning combination or replay winning combination) is internally won once or continuously winning, a non-AT state game period (normal) A lottery (cycle shortening lottery) is performed to shorten the number of games in the game period. If this cycle shortening lottery is won, the game period of the non-AT state of the current set is shortened, and the period until shifting to the AT state can be shortened. Further, in the present embodiment, in the AT game, if the "miss" or a predetermined internal winning combination (replay combination) is internally won once or if the winning is continuous, the additional lottery of the AT game (direct addition lottery) is performed. If it is performed and the additional lottery is won, the number of remaining AT games is increased.

That is, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the high RT game state game in which the bonus is carried over, even if the internal winning combination becomes “miss”, it is possible to continue the advantageous game without winning the bonus. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the bonus given at the time of the “miss” win is changed according to the type of the sub game state (“normal state” or “AT state”) in the high RT game state in which the bonus is carried over. be able to.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a gaming value to the “miss” that occurs in the high RT game state game in which the bonus is carried over, and it is possible to widen the range of the game. Further, in a high RT game state in which a bonus is carried over, it is possible to appropriately generate a “miss” in which a bonus is not won, so that it is possible to maintain gambling of the gaming machine. From the above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the high RT gaming state in which the bonus is carried over.

Further, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, if the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals at present is less than 3, the player performs a MAX bet operation. However, the MAX bet operation is invalid. In this case, in the state between the 2MB flags, the game of playing two cards by the MAX bet operation is not started, and it is possible to more surely avoid the winning of the bonus “2MB” which is being carried over.

That is, in this embodiment, in the state between the 2 MB flags, a game in which the number of medals that would be disadvantageous to the player cannot be played by the MAX bet operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, even a player who does not have knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Various effects obtained by lottery for shortening the cycle of normal games]
In the present embodiment, as a result of subtracting the number of remaining games in the current game of the normal game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery performed during the normal game, the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games). When it becomes, the surplus shortened game number corresponding to the subtraction result is stocked. Then, the number of stocked surplus shortened games is applied as the number of shortened games of the next set. In this case, the game is played with the game period in the non-AT state shortened from the start of the next set.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal game of the next set can be applied to the normal game of the next set without wasting the number of shortened games (privilege) that has become the surplus in the current set in the normal game. The player's interest in the game can be given. Further, in this case, since it is possible to generate a motive for causing the player to execute the next set of normal games, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Various effects obtained in simulated BB games]
As described above, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment is provided with the pseudo BB game in which the payout of medals is increased, and in the normal game or the AT game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. It Therefore, the normal game is not a game in which the game is simply consumed, but a game in which more medals can be obtained by the pseudo BB game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game started during the normal game, even when the "miss" or the "rare part" is internally won, the cycle of the non-AT state game period (the normal game period) Short lottery will be held. Then, as a result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery at this time, when the subtracted result is less than "0", the surplus corresponding to the subtracted result The shortened number of minutes is stocked. Then, the number of stocked surplus shortened games is applied as the number of shortened games of the next set.

On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game started during the AT game, if the “Loss” or the “Rare role” is won internally, the additional lottery for the number of AT games (direct online lottery) is performed and the additional lottery is won. In this case, the current number of remaining AT games is increased.

That is, in the pseudo BB game, a privilege given to the winning of the “miss” or the “rare role” according to the type of the sub game state at the start of the pseudo BB game (“normal state” or “AT state”) The content of can be different. Furthermore, even in the pseudo BB game, it is possible to give the “miss” a game value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the pseudo BB game.

Also, in the AT game during the 2MB flag state, not only is the game that informs the player of the small winning combination that has been internally won, but the pseudo BB game may be started. It is possible to prevent the AT game from becoming a monotonous game.

[Various effects obtained in the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" is won]
In the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" of the present embodiment, as described above, the character "Kappa" eats the sushi items that are sequentially issued for each game according to the type of the internal winning combination, and The number of AT start games is determined according to the type of sushi material eaten. That is, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa", the basic stay game number in the AT state (AT start game number) is not determined by one lottery, but over a plurality of games. , Is determined based on the type of internal winning combination and the sushi story (game information) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player's interest in the AT number game acquisition game (AT start game number determination game) can be increased.

Further, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" of the present embodiment, as described above, even if the internal winning combination is "miss", the data (game information) of the sushi item after the next game is , It may be converted into better data for the player. That is, in this embodiment, even in the AT start game number determination game, it is possible to give the “miss” a gaming value, and to maintain the interest even when the “miss” is determined.

[Various effects obtained by AT lottery (race result lottery) based on the number of payouts related to Bell during the cycle]
In the present embodiment, in each cycle of the non-AT state, the number of medals paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small win relating to the bell is stopped and displayed is counted by the bell payout number counter during the cycle. .. Then, by referring to the race result lottery table corresponding to the value of the bell payout number counter during the cycle, whether or not the race result is won (AT win) is determined by lottery. As a result, the probability of determining the start of the AT differs depending on the number of medals paid out based on the small winning combination related to the bell. As a result, it is possible to complicate the process of determining the start of the AT and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, any one of "213 bells 1 to 8", "231 bells 1 to 8", "312 bells 1 to 8" or "321 bells 1 to 8" (push order bell) is an internal winning combination. If the stop button is pressed in the order of “left center right” and “left center right”, the “control role” is always stopped and displayed, and one medal is paid out. That is, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, if the order of pressing the stop buttons is set to "left center right" or "left center", the payout of medals in one cycle is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the payout of medals in one cycle is less than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment), the race result lottery table (No. 3) having a high winning probability of AT is referred to. It Therefore, the smaller the payout of medals in one cycle, the higher the probability of winning the AT. Therefore, during non-AT, for example, if the order of pressing the stop buttons is set to "left center right" or "left center right", it is possible to notify the player that the payout of medals in one cycle will be reduced, so Can reduce the number of medals paid out.

Further, during non-AT, the pressing order in which the symbol combination related to “CT bell” is stopped and displayed on the activated line may be notified with a predetermined probability. With this configuration, when the push order is notified during non-AT, the notification is followed (the number of medals paid out is increased) or not (the medals are paid out less or 0). It is possible to allow the player to arbitrarily select.

In addition, in this Embodiment, when "213 bells 1-8", "231 bells 1-8", "312 bells 1-8", or "321 bells 1-8" is determined as an internal winning combination, " When the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the pressing order of the stop button that is capable of displaying "CT bell" in a stopped state, the "control combination" is stopped and displayed, and one medal is paid out.

However, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order in which the display combination for paying out the specific number of medals is stopped and displayed, and the predetermined number smaller than the specific number It is also possible to provide a pressing order in which the display combination for paying out the medals is stopped and displayed.

For example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order in which the display combination for paying out 9 medals is stopped and displayed and the pressing order for the display combination in which three medals are paid out are stopped and displayed May be provided. Further, the display combination for paying out the three bells may be displayed in a stopped state when the pressing order is corresponding and the stop operation is performed on one reel at a predetermined timing. Three coins has the same value as the bet number of medals for starting one game. Therefore, by providing the pressing order in which the display combination for paying out three medals is stopped and displayed, it is possible to increase the number of medals to be paid out while eliminating the increase or decrease in the number of medals in one game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of medals paid out (number of awards) is counted in the non-AT game state. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to count the value based on the number of paid out medals. For example, the difference in the number of medals when the internal winning combination relating to the bell is determined may be counted. Further, when the display combination for paying out a specific number of medals is stopped and displayed, the first value (for example, “5”) is counted, and the display combination for paying out a predetermined number of medals smaller than the specific number is stopped and displayed. In this case, a second value (eg, “1”) different from the first value may be counted. Further, the first value and the second value may be randomly determined for each cycle in the non-AT gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the total payout number of medals obtained by winning the small winning combination related to the bell in one cycle is small (less than the second value), the race in which the winning probability of AT is high is high. As a result, the lottery table (3) is referred to. However, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, the race result lottery table to be referred to is determined according to the first place of the total payout number of medals obtained by winning the small win related to the bell. Good. Further, when the total number of paid-out medals obtained by winning the small winning combination related to the bell is large, the race result lottery table having a high winning probability of AT may be referred to.

[Various effects obtained by AT net increase management]
In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total difference) is greater than or equal to the specified number, the race win rate is rewritten to 100% (see S728 in FIG. 114). That is, the next AT operation is determined. As a result, it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period. As a result, even if the payout of medals occurs frequently during the AT game period, the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which MB (middle bonus) is won during the AT game period, and the payout of medals equal to or more than the number of medals paid out by the winning of the small winning combination related to the bell may be performed. .. Even in this case, since it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. Further, in the MB during the AT game period, a small winning combination that is unlikely to be stopped and displayed during normal operation (during non-MB) may be configured to be stop/displayable. Then, during normal operation (during non-MB), if a small winning combination that has a low probability of being stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed, a game property that makes it easy to determine the addition of the AT game number (AT payout number) may be added. ..

In the present embodiment, the target number obtained by subtracting the net additional number of medals paid out in the AT game period from the specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This allows the player to be notified of the conditions under which the transition to the next AT game state is determined. As a result, the interest of the game during the AT game period can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the process during race_game start, "0" is set to the period bell payout number counter (the period bell payout number counter is updated). However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured such that the bell payout number counter is set to "0" during the cycle during the race. In this case, the value updated in the bell payout number counter during the cycle during the race is treated as the value for the next cycle.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the next AT gaming state is determined, the player is notified of the transition to the AT gaming state through the race. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the transition to the AT gaming state is decided, the next AT gaming state is started without passing through the race (after the AT gaming state is finished). Good.

<Variations>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including the operational effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

[Modification 1]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above-mentioned embodiment, when the "miss" is won in the normal game or the pseudo BB game (one or continuous winning), the game period in the normal state (the number of stay games) is shortened (cycle reduction). There is a possibility that you can get the privilege. In addition, in the pachi-slot 1 of the above-described embodiment, if "miss" is won in the AT game, there is a possibility that a benefit of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a game in a sub game state other than the normal game, the pseudo BB game, and the AT game, a function to give a privilege by a winning of "miss" (one time or continuous winning) is provided. May be. Therefore, in the first modification, a pachi-slot having a function of obtaining a benefit of AT winning when "miss" is won in the transition effect game (race effect) will be further described.

(1) Race_Loss Lottery Table First, with reference to FIG. 129, the race_Loss lottery table necessary for executing the above-mentioned privilege (AT winning) awarding function in the transition production game (race production) will be described. To do. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the configuration of the lottery table during race_miss. Note that, during the race_missing lottery table, for example, the winning/non-winning of the race in the during-race_missing lottery process (S919) in the during-race_game start process (see later-described FIG. 130) described later is performed. It is referred to when determining the winning/non-winning of the AT game.

The during-race_miss lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning/non-winning winning of the race and the lottery value for each value (“1” to “4”) of the losing counter. The losing counter is a counter for managing (counting) the number of consecutive winnings of “missing” during the race effect period (10 games).

Therefore, for example, when the “miss” is won three times in succession during the race effect, the value of the lose counter is “3”. In this case, the probability of winning the race is 6555/32768, and the winning of the race is not successful. The probability of winning the race is 26214/32768 (winning the race winning flag). When the value of the losing counter is "1" (when the first "missing" is won), the winning of the race is always unwinned (AT unwinned).

(2) Processing During Race_Game Start Time Next, with reference to FIG. 130, processing during race_game start time in Modification 1 will be described. The process during race_game start of this example is also performed in S349 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception process of the above embodiment.

Further, in this example, the processes other than the process during race_game start by the sub control circuit 101 are the same as those in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, only the processing during race_game start will be described.

As is clear from a comparison between the flow chart of the process during race_game start of this example shown in FIG. 130 and the flow chart of the process during race_game start of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 111, during race_of this example The processing from S901 to S915 in the flowchart of the game start processing is the same as the processing from S641 to S655 in the flowchart of the during-race_game start processing of the above embodiment. Therefore, the description of the processing from S901 to S915 is omitted here.

In this example, after the processing of S915 or when the determination of S913 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the lottery on the race result is the non-winning of the race victory and the internal winning combination is "miss". Is determined (S916).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S916 that the determination condition of S916 is not satisfied (NO in S916), the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the loss counter (S917). Then, after the processing of S917, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S922 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S916 that the determination condition of S916 is satisfied (YES in S916), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the loss counter (S918). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the during-race lost time lottery table (see FIG. 129) and performs the during-race lost time lottery processing based on the value of the lost counter after addition (S919).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the lottery processing during race_miss is a non-winning result of a race victory (S920). In S920, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery process during race_miss is a non-winning race win (in the case of YES determination in S920), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S922 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S920 that the result of the lottery process during race_miss is not a non-winning race victory (when NO is determined in S920), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag. (S921). Then, after the processing of S921, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S922 described later.

After the processing of S917 or S921, or when the determination of S920 is YES, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to "push-order bell" (S922). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S923). Then, after the processing of S923, the sub CPU 102 ends the during-race_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In the pachi-slot of the modified example 1 described above, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment is obtained, and even in the transition effect state (during the period of the race effect), it is possible to give the “miss” a gaming value. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition production game. It should be noted that, in the first modification, an example in which when the "miss" is internally won once (when the value of the miss counter is "1"), the non-win of the race victory is definitely determined, is explained. The present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of the race may be won with a predetermined probability even when the “miss” is won once.

[Modification 2]
In the modified example 2, as in the modified example 1, when the "miss" is won in the transition production game (race production) (one or consecutive winnings), the pachislot machine has a function of obtaining the benefit of AT winning. Will be described. However, in this example, the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “miss” winning is different from the variation 1 described above.

Specifically, in this example, according to the value of the loss counter, not only winning/non-winning of the race win, but also the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the normal game set (cycle) (see FIG. 36). Re-lottery of the race win rate using will also be selectable. Therefore, the configuration of the lottery table during race_miss used in this example is different from that of the first modification.

Here, with reference to FIG. 131, the lottery table during race_miss in the modified example 2 will be described. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the configuration of the lottery table during race_miss in this example. Also in this example, the in-race lottery table during lottery is referred to, for example, in the in-race lottery process during race during game start process in the modification 1 described in FIG. 130 (S919). It

In the race_missing lottery table in this example, the type of lottery result (winning/non-winning of the race and re-winning of the winning percentage of the race) and the lottery values are shown for each value of the losing counter (“1” to “3”). The correspondence with the lottery value is specified. Also in this example, the value of the losing counter indicates the number of consecutive winnings of "missing" during the race effect period (10 games).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 131, when the value of the loss counter is “1”, the winning result of the race is always a non-winning result of the race. When the value of the loss counter is "2", the re-lottery of the race win rate is always obtained as the lottery result. When the value of the lose counter is “3”, the winning of the race is always won as the lottery result.

In this example, the value of the loss counter is “2” in the in-race lottery process during lottery process (S919) during the process during race_game start (see FIG. 130 described later), and the lottery is won. In this case, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set in the process of S919, and re-randomizes the race win rate data based on the set value.

In this example, the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “miss” winning is the same as that of the above-described modification 1 except that the lottery form thereof is different from that of the modification 1. Therefore, also in the second modification, the same effect as in the first modification can be obtained. It should be noted that in the second modification, an example in which when the “miss” is internally won once (when the value of the miss counter is “1”), the non-win of the race victory is definitely determined, is explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the winning of the re-lottery of the race win rate and the winning of the race victory may be obtained with a predetermined probability even when the “miss” is won once.

[Modification 3]
In the modified examples 1 and 2, a pachi-slot having a function of obtaining a benefit of AT winning when "miss" is won in the transition effect game (race effect) (one time or continuous winning) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the transition effect game, if "miss" is won, another benefit may be given. For example, if "miss" is won in the transition effect game (one or consecutive wins), the pseudo BB game is highly likely to be won and stocked in the "additional challenge state" game over a predetermined number of games. May be stocked.

In this case, the game of the "additional challenge state" stocked during the transition production game (race production) is a specific symbol combination ("Yellow BAR"-"Yellow BAR"-"Yellow BAR") after shifting to the AT state. It is displayed as a stop on the activated line and started.

In the configuration of this example, the game after the AT state transition can be made a more advantageous game for the player, and the difference in the playability (the advantage of the game) between the AT state and other states can be increased. You can Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and the states other than the AT state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 4]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, when the "miss" is won in the normal game or the pseudo BB game (one or continuous winning), the game period (the number of stay games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle reduction). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the normal game or the pseudo BB game, when the "miss" is won (one time or continuous winning), the cycle shortening lottery may not be performed.

In this case, the configurations of the cycle shortening lottery table and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table used in this example are the same as the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 46 and 47) and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 48) of the above embodiment. ), the column defining the lottery value for “miss” is deleted.

As in this example, in the normal game or the pseudo BB game, the game is provided between the AT state and the other states (the advantage of the game) by not providing the privilege when the "miss" is won. The difference can be increased. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and the states other than the AT state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 5]
In the pachi-slot of the above-mentioned embodiment or the above-mentioned various modified examples, in a plurality of types of sub gaming states, the configuration of giving a predetermined privilege at the time of "missing" winning has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of subs. Only in one of the sub-game states of the game states, the privilege giving function at the time of “miss” winning may be provided.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) or the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), the total number of medals accumulated in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than three. In some cases, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the operation is invalidated (see the MAXBET insertion process in FIG. 65), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total number of medals accumulated in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than 3, the player performs a MAX bet operation while performing a specific operation (other than the MAX bet operation). The number of medals (number of bets) may be one or two.

In Modification 6, as an example, when the total number of medals accumulated in the credit and the current number of inserted medals in the inter-flag state is less than 3, the player presses a predetermined stop button. A configuration example in which the maximum number of medals can be selected to one or two by performing a MAX bet operation (while a predetermined stop button is pressed) will be described.

Specifically, in this example, when the total number of medals accumulated in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than 3 in the inter-flag state, the player presses the left stop button 19L. Meanwhile, when the MAX bet operation is performed, the number of medals to be set is set to one, and when the player performs the MAX bet operation while pressing the middle stop button 19C, the number of medals to be set is set to two. When setting the number of medals to be set, whether or not the stop button is pressed and the type of the pressed stop button are connected to the input port of the main control circuit 91. It is determined by referring to the current input status of the stop switch (on/off information of the input port).

In this example, the processing contents other than the MAXBET input processing are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, so only the MAXBET input processing will be described here, and the description of the other processing will be omitted. Further, since the configuration of the pachi-slot of this example is similar to that of the above-described embodiment, the description of the configuration of the pachi-slot is omitted.

(1) MAXBET Input Process Next, the content of the MAXBET input process in this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 132. The MAXBET insertion process of this example is also performed in S46 during the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIG. 64), as in the above embodiment.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a MAX bet operation has been performed (S931).

In S931, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation is not performed (NO in S931), the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion process, and the process is the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 64). (See) S47. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S931 that the MAX bet operation has been performed (YES in S931), the main CPU 93 determines whether "2MB" or "3MB" is established (win). It is determined (S932).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S932 that "2MB" or "3MB" is not established (winning) (NO in S932), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S936 described below. On the other hand, in S932, when the main CPU 93 determines that “2 MB” or “3 MB” is established (winning) (YES in S932), the main CPU 93 determines the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits. It is determined whether or not the total of (the number of stored sheets) is “3” or more (S933).

In S933, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is “3” or more (when YES is determined in S933), the main CPU 93 causes the medals to be applied. The number of sheets is set to "3" (S934). After the processing of S934, the main CPU 93 terminates the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S933 that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (reserved number) is not "3" or more (NO in S933), the main CPU 93 specifies the number of medals. A loading process is performed (S935). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets one or two as the number of medals depending on the type of the stop button pressed during the MAX bet operation. Note that details of the number-of-sheets specification input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 described later. Then, after the processing of S935, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIG. 64).

Here, returning again to the processing of S932, if the determination of S932 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined number of credited medals (S936). At this time, one, two, or three sheets are set. Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIG. 64).

(2) Number-Specified Input Process Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the number-specified input process performed in S935 in the flowchart of the MAXBET input process of this example (see FIG. 132) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not only one stop button is currently pressed (whether or not only the input port of one stop button is in the on-edge state) (S941). In this processing, the main CPU 93 executes the processing in S941 based on the ON/OFF information of the input port of the stop button detected in the input port check processing (S202) in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 75) under the control of the main CPU 93. The determination process may be performed, or the main CPU 93 may check the status of the input port of the main control circuit 91 during the process of S941 and perform the determination process of S941.

When the main CPU 93 determines in S941 that only one stop button is not currently pressed (NO in S941), the main CPU 93 terminates the number-of-sheets-specifying-insertion process and simultaneously inserts the MAXBET of this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, in this example, when the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than 3, if the stop button is not pressed during the MAX bet operation, or a plurality of stop buttons is pressed. If is pressed, the MAX bet operation is invalid.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S941 that only one stop button is currently pressed (YES in S941), the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is the left stop button 19L. It is determined whether or not there is (whether or not the state of the input port of the left stop button 19L is the on-edge state) (S942). In this processing, the main CPU 93 executes the processing in S942 based on the ON/OFF information of the input port of the stop button detected in the input port check processing (S202) in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 75) under the control of the main CPU 93. The determination process may be performed, or the main CPU 93 may check the status of the input port of the main control circuit 91 during the process of S942 and perform the determination process of S942.

In S942, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stopped stop button is the left stop button 19L (YES in S942), the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (the number of accumulated credits) is “1” or more. It is determined whether or not (S943).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S943 that the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is not equal to or larger than "1" (NO in S943), the main CPU 93 ends the number-of-credits specifying process, and also MAXBET of this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, when the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is less than three, even if the MAX bet operation is performed while pressing the left stop button 19L, the number of credits (the accumulated number of coins) is reduced. If the number is 0, the MAX bet operation is invalid.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S943 that the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is “1” or more (YES in S943), the main CPU 93 sets “1” in the number of medals. (S944). Then, after the processing of S944, the main CPU 93 finishes the number-of-sheets-designated loading process and also the MAXBET loading process of this example (see FIG. 132).

Here, returning again to the processing of S942, in S942, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is not the left stop button 19L (when NO is determined in S942), the main CPU 93 is currently pressed. It is determined whether or not the stop button being operated is the middle stop button 19C (whether or not the state of the input port of the middle stop button 19C is the on-edge state) (S945). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S942 described above, the main CPU 93 causes the input port of the stop button detected in the input port check process (S202) in the interrupt process (see FIG. 75) under the control of the main CPU 93. The determination processing of S945 may be performed based on the ON/OFF information of the above, or during the processing of S945, the main CPU 93 checks the status of the input port of the main control circuit 91 and performs the determination processing of S945. Good.

In S945, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is not the middle stop button 19C (NO in S945), the main CPU 93 terminates the number-of-sheets-designated insertion process and also inserts the MAXBET of this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, in this example, when the total number of currently inserted medals and the number of credits (the number of stored credits) is less than 3, even if the MAX bet operation is performed while pressing the right stop button 19R, the MAX bet The operation is invalid.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S945 that the pressed stop button is the middle stop button 19C (YES in S945), the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (the number of accumulated credits) is “2” or more. It is determined whether or not (S946).

In S946, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is not equal to or more than “2” (NO in S946), the main CPU 93 terminates the number-of-credits-specifying insertion process, and simultaneously, inserts the MAXBET of this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, when the total of the current inserted number of medals and the number of credits (reserved number) is less than 3, even if the MAX bet operation is performed while pressing the middle stop button 19C, the number of credits (retained number) is If the number is less than one, the MAX bet operation is invalid.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S946 that the number of credits (the number of stored coins) is “2” or more (YES in S946), the main CPU 93 sets “2” in the number of medals. (S947). Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 93 finishes the number-of-sheets-designated loading process and also the MAXBET loading process of this example (see FIG. 132).

As described above, in the pachi-slot of this example, in the game in the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state, if the total of the current number of credits and the number of inserted medals is less than 3, the player causes MAX. Even if the bet operation is performed, if the predetermined stop button is not pressed at that time, the MAX bet operation is invalid. Therefore, in this example as well, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is difficult to start a game of playing two cards by the MAX bet operation in the state between the 2MB flags, and it is possible to more surely avoid winning the bonus “2MB” being carried over. be able to. That is, in this example, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained.

Further, when the method for setting the number of medals to be multiplied during the MAX bet operation of this example is adopted, even if the number of medals cannot be set only by the MAX bet operation, the MAX button is pressed while pressing the stop button corresponding to the number of medals. By performing the bet operation, the player can arbitrarily and easily select the number of medals.

Further, in the method of setting the number of medals to be multiplied during the MAX bet operation of this example, the operation is performed while pressing the stop button corresponding to the number of medals, but finally, the player desires by the MAX bet operation. Since the number of medals to be played is put into the game, the flow of the game is not hindered. Further, in a gaming machine provided with a regulation that sets the number of medals to be set only by MAX bet operation, in the case of providing a function that allows the player to arbitrarily select a predetermined number of wagers from a plurality of types of medals, If the technique for setting the number of medals to be applied during the MAX bet operation of this example is adopted, such a specification change can be realized easily and at low cost.

In Modification 6, an example in which the stop button corresponding to the one-sheet hanging is the left stop button 19L and the stop button corresponding to the two-sheet hanging is the middle stop button 19C has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. The combination of the number of medals to be set and the type of the stop button to be pressed can be set arbitrarily.

Further, the technique of setting the number of medals to be multiplied during the MAX bet operation of Modification 6 can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the MAX bet operation is controlled to be dedicated to two coins. In this case, for example, when the player performs a MAX bet operation while pressing the right stop button 19R, the number of medals is controlled to be set to three.

[Modification 7]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above-described embodiment, various lottery related to awarding a privilege to the player is performed in each period of the normal game and the AT game. Specifically, in the normal game, the pseudo BB lottery, the cycle reduction lottery, the race win expectation data UP lottery processing, etc. are performed (see FIGS. 101 and 102), and in the AT game, the pseudo BB lottery and the AT game number Addition lottery, push-order navigation lottery, and the like are performed (see FIG. 111).

The winning probability of the privilege in the lottery, the amount of the privilege that can be obtained (the number of shortened games to be added and the number of additional games), etc. are constant in each period of the normal game and the AT game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in each period of the normal game and the AT game, a function capable of increasing (increasing) the winning probability of the privilege in the lottery, the amount of the privilege that can be acquired, etc. , "Winning rate UP function"), and a function that allows the player to arbitrarily select the function may be provided.

In Modification 7, an example in which the winning rate UP function and the selection function thereof are provided in the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment will be described.

In the winning rate UP function of this example, after the operation of the function is started, a period for a predetermined number of games and a period during which various types of lottery related to benefits are not executed (hereinafter referred to as “no lottery period”) are provided. Then, after the no-lottery period ends, a lottery table in which the winning probability of the privilege and/or the amount of winable (winable) privilege increases for a period of a specific number of games (hereinafter referred to as “winning rate UP period”) Refer to and execute various lottery related to benefits. That is, in this example, the operation period of the winning rate UP function is configured by a lottery-free period and a winning rate UP period, and the operation period of the winning rate UP function is a predetermined number of games in the no-lottery period and a winning rate UP period. It is the sum of the specified number of games.

(1) Overview of the winning rate UP function First, an outline of the operation of the winning rate UP function during the normal game will be described. In this example, if a specific condition is satisfied at the start of the normal game, a selection effect that allows the player to select whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function is performed. In this example, the selection effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 11.

Then, in this selection effect, when the player selects the operation of the winning rate UP function, the operation of the winning rate UP function is started from the game. On the other hand, in this selection effect, when the player does not select the operation of the winning rate UP function, the winning rate UP function does not operate, and the normal game operation when the winning rate UP function is not operated is continuously executed. To be done.

When the player selects the winning percentage UP function during the normal game, first, a predetermined number of games from the game in which the selection effect is executed (no lottery period), pseudo BB lottery, cycle shortening lottery, race win expectation data UP lottery etc. are not performed. Next, after the end of the lottery-free period, the player has the winning rate UP function in each lottery such as a period of a specific number of games (winning rate UP period), pseudo BB lottery, cycle shortening lottery, and race win expectation data UP lottery. Compared to the lottery table to be referred to when not selected (see FIG. 40, FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lottery table of the race win expectation data UP lottery is not shown), and the winning probability of the privilege and/or the privilege that can be acquired. It is executed with reference to the lottery table in which the amount (number of shortened games) increases (rises).

Next, the operation outline of the winning rate UP function during the AT game will be described. In this example, if a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the AT game, a selection effect that allows the player to select whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function is performed. Then, in the selection effect, when the player selects the operation of the winning rate UP function, the operation of the winning rate UP function is started from the game. On the other hand, in the selection effect, if the player does not select the operation of the winning rate UP function, the winning rate UP function does not operate, and the AT game operation when the winning rate UP function is inactive is continuously executed. To be done.

When the player selects the winning percentage UP function during the AT game, first, a predetermined number of games from the game in which the selection effect is executed (no lottery period), pseudo BB lottery, AT game number addition lottery, push order Navi lottery etc. are not performed. Then, after the end of the no-lottery period, the player has the winning rate UP function in each lottery such as the period of the specific game number (the winning percentage UP period), the pseudo BB lottery, the addition lottery of the AT game number, the push order navigation lottery, etc. Compared to the lottery table to be referred to when no selection is made (see FIGS. 41, 45 and 46, the lottery table for the push order navigation lottery is not shown), the winning probability of the privilege and/or the amount of the privilege that can be acquired ( It is executed by referring to a lottery table in which the number of games to be added) increases.

In each period of the normal game and the AT game, the number of times the winning rate UP function is activated may be limited to once, or the winning rate UP function may be executed a plurality of times. In the latter case, the operation period of the winning rate UP function may be changed every time the function is executed, or may be constant. Furthermore, in the latter case, an upper limit may or may not be set for the number of times the winning rate UP function is executed.

In addition, in this example, the lottery-free period and the winning rate UP period can be arbitrarily set, and both periods may be the same or different from each other. Further, the operating period of the winning rate UP function during the normal game may be the same as or different from the operating period of the winning rate UP function during the AT game.

In addition, in this example, the operation period of the winning rate UP function in the normal game is set to end within the normal game period, and the operating period of the winning rate UP function in the AT game ends in the AT game period. Is set to.

Then, in the normal game, the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (the condition at which the operation of the winning rate UP function can be started) is the timing at which the operation of the winning rate UP function ends within the normal game period. It can be set arbitrarily.

For example, in the winning rate UP function of the normal game, when the non-lottery period is 10 games and the winning rate UP period is 10 games (when the operation period of the winning rate UP function is 20 games), for example, The winning rate UP function can be operated in a state where the number of remaining games of the normal game in the cycle is 20 games or more (the value of the cycle counter is “19” or more). In this case, for example, if the number of remaining games in the normal game is 20 or more, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be enabled for each game, or the number of the remaining games in the normal game is 20 games. In the state as described above, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated at a predetermined number of games.

In addition, for example, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated only when the number of remaining games in the normal game reaches a specific number of games longer than the operation period of the winning rate UP function. In this configuration, when the number of remaining games is greater than the specific number of games, the cycle reduction lottery is won, and as a result, when the remaining number of games is less than the specific number of games without being the specific number of games, In order to end the operation of the winning rate UP function within the normal game period, the operating period of the winning rate UP function may be shortened, or the winning rate UP function may not be operated.

In the former configuration (the configuration for shortening the operating period of the winning rate UP function), for example, when the preset operating period of the winning rate UP function is 20 games, and the number of remaining games of the normal game is 20 games, If the selection effect of the winning percentage UP function is set to occur, the number of remaining games is 30 and the number of remaining games is 19 when the number of remaining games is 30 and the cycle reduction lottery is performed. At times, the operation period of the winning rate UP function may be shortened to 19 games. In this case, the non-lottery period may be 9 games and the winning percentage UP period may be 10 games, or the no-lottery period may be 10 games and the winning percentage UP period may be 9 games. When such a configuration is adopted, the winning rate UP function can be activated flexibly according to the progress of the game.

Also, in the AT game, the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (the condition under which the winning rate UP function can start operating) is also the timing at which the operation of the winning rate UP function ends within the AT game period. , Can be set arbitrarily.

For example, in the winning rate UP function of the AT game, when the no-lottery period is 5 games and the winning rate UP period is 5 games (when the operation period of the winning rate UP function is 10 games), the AT game The selection effect of the winning rate UP function can be generated in a state where the number of remaining games is 10 or more (the value of the number of remaining AT games is “9” or more). In this case, for example, if the number of remaining games in the AT game is 10 or more, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be enabled for each game, or the number of remaining games in the AT game is 10 games. In the state as described above, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated at a predetermined number of games. In addition, for example, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated only when the number of remaining games of the AT game reaches a specific number of games of 10 games or more (more than the operating period of the winning rate UP function). ..

As described above, in this example, the operation period of the winning rate UP function in the normal game, and the timing when the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (specific condition that the operation of the winning rate UP function can be started) is applicable. The operation period of the winning rate UP function is appropriately set so as not to extend between the normal game and the transition effect game. Further, in the AT game, the operation period of the winning rate UP function, and the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (the predetermined condition at which the operation of the winning rate UP function can be started) is the operating period of the corresponding winning rate UP function. Is appropriately set so as not to cross the AT game and the transition effect game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The operating period of the winning rate UP function in the normal game may extend between the normal game and the transition effect game, or the operating period of the winning rate UP function in the AT game may extend between the AT game and the transition effect game. In this case, during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, for example, in a game after the game state has transitioned (transition effect game), an increase (increase) in the winning probability of the privilege or the amount of the privilege that can be acquired. Various lottery tables that are subsequently secured are additionally prepared so that the winning percentage UP function continues to operate even in the gaming state after the transition.

In each period of the normal game and the AT game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won and the pseudo BB game is started during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the number of digested games during the pseudo BB game period is: The winning percentage UP function is not counted in the number of consumed games during the operating period. In addition, when the pseudo BB game is executed during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, various lottery related to the privilege performed in the pseudo BB game is the winning probability of the privilege and/or the amount of the privilege that can be won (shortening game. It may be executed by referring to a lottery table in which the number and the number of games to be added increase.

In addition, during the AT game period, when the winning lottery rate UP function is activated, if the winning lottery of the AT games is won, the number of winning extra AT games (lottery result) remains for each winning game. It may be added to the number, or at the end of the winning rate UP function of the AT game, the sum total of the additional AT game numbers acquired during the operation period of the function may be collectively added to the remaining AT game number.

In the case of adopting the former mode (a mode in which the number of winning additional AT games for each winning game is added to the number of remaining AT games), the winning rate UP function during the operation is finished again. There is a possibility that the generation condition of the selection effect of the UP function will be satisfied. For example, when the operation period of the winning rate UP function in the AT game is set to 20 games and the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is generated when the remaining AT games reaches 20, the remaining AT If the number of games is 9 (while the winning rate UP function is operating), the winning AT game number of 15 games will be won by the direct winning lottery, and the additional AT game number won in the game will be added to the remaining AT games. At that time, the number of remaining AT games becomes 24 games. In this case, before the winning rate UP function currently in operation ends, the number of remaining AT games becomes 20 again, and there is a possibility that the condition for generating the selective effect of the winning rate UP function is satisfied. When such a situation occurs, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is not generated.

The operation control of the winning rate UP function described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 performs a process of determining whether or not to grant a predetermined privilege and/or a process of determining the amount of the predetermined privilege to be granted (a privilege grant determination unit), and Means for executing an effect in which the player can select whether the probability of a predetermined privilege and/or whether or not the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be granted is increased when a specific condition is satisfied (privilege winning rate) It also serves as an ascending selection means).

(2) Various lottery tables Next, in this example, an example of various lottery tables used during the operation period of the winning rate UP function (the winning rate UP period) will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB lottery table (general, when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the winning rate UP function operation during the normal game. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table used during the winning rate UP function operation during the AT game. 136 and 137 are diagrams showing an example of the cycle reduction lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the winning rate UP function operation during the normal game. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the winning rate UP function operation during the AT game. In addition, FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a directly-applied lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the winning rate UP function operation during the AT game. Here, similarly to the above embodiment, the drawing of the lottery table of the race win expectation data UP lottery and the lottery table of the push-order navigation lottery used during the win rate UP function operation are omitted.

The configuration of each lottery table is the lottery table used when the winning rate UP function is not operating, that is, the corresponding lottery table described in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 40, 41, and 43 to 46). Since it is the same as, the description of the configuration of each lottery table will be omitted. However, in each lottery table used during the operation of the winning rate UP function, the setting of the lottery value is different from that of the lottery table used when the winning rate UP function is not operating. Specifically, in each lottery table used during the lottery rate UP function, as compared to the lottery table used when the lottery rate UP function is not operated, the winning probability of the privilege defined in the lottery table and// Alternatively, the lottery value is appropriately set so that the amount of privilege that can be acquired increases (rises).

For example, the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table of FIG. 40 used when the win rate UP function is not activated, and the pseudo BB lottery (general medium, win rate UP function selected) table of FIG. 134 used when the win rate UP function is activated. Comparing with, in the pseudo BB lottery (general medium, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table of FIG. 134, the winning column of the pseudo BB game (“BB winning” in the internal winning combination other than the “fixed winning combination”) is selected. The lottery value defined in the column) becomes larger than that of the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table of FIG. 40, and the winning probability of the pseudo BB game becomes high. In addition, for example, the pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparation/during race) table of FIG. 41 used when the winning rate UP function is not operated, and the pseudo BB lottery (during AT) of FIG. 135 used when the winning rate UP function is operated. , When the winning rate UP function is selected) table, in the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table of FIG. 135, the pseudo BB is selected in the internal winning combinations other than the “winning combination”. The lottery value defined in the game winning column (“BB winning” column) becomes larger than that in the pseudo BB lottery (during AT/AT preparing/race) table in FIG. 41, and the winning of the pseudo BB game is shown. The probability increases.

In addition, for example, the cycle reduction lottery tables of FIGS. 43 and 44 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated, and the cycle reduction lottery tables of FIG. 136 and FIG. 137 used when the winning rate UP function is activated (when the winning rate UP function is selected). ) Compared with ), in the cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 136 and FIG. 137 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), it can be obtained in the internal winning combination other than “5 bells” and “3 rare wins” The lottery value is set such that the number of different shortening games is larger than that in the cycle shortening lottery table of FIGS. 43 and 44. In the cycle reduction lottery tables (when the winning rate UP function is selected) of FIGS. 136 and 137, the internal winning combination is “miss”, “miss 2 consecutive”, “miss 3 consecutive”, “lip 3 consecutive” or “weak”. The lottery value is set such that the probability of winning the shortened game number in the case of the “first shot” is also larger than that in the cycle-reduction lottery table of FIGS. 43 and 44.

In addition, for example, the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table of FIG. 45 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated, and the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table of FIG. 138 used when the winning rate UP function is activated (when the winning rate UP function is selected). Comparing with each other, in the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) of FIG. 138, the number of shortened games that can be obtained in the internal winning combination other than the “reach eye lip” and the “determined winning combination” are determined. The lottery value is set to be larger than that of the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table of FIG. Further, in the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table of FIG. 138 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), when the internal winning combination is “normal lip”, “push order bell” or “3 bells”, the number of shortened games is won. The lottery value is set so that the probability of doing is larger than that of the pseudo BB cycle reduction lottery table of FIG.

Furthermore, for example, when comparing the directly-applied lottery table of FIG. 46 used when the winning rate UP function is not operated and the directly-applied lottery table of FIG. 139 (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used when the winning rate UP function is activated, In the direct addition reduction lottery table of FIG. 139 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), the number of additional games that can be acquired in all the internal winning combinations to be randomized is larger than that of the direct addition lottery table of FIG. The lottery value is set so that Further, in the directly-applied lottery table of FIG. 139 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), the probability of winning the number of additional games when the internal winning combination is “miss”, “weak che” or “watermelon” is also shown in FIG. The lottery value is set so as to be larger than that of the directly-applied lottery table.

(3) Various Related Processings of Winning Rate UP Function Next, specific examples of various processings related to the execution of the above-mentioned winning rate UP function will be described. The execution process of the winning rate UP function in this example is controlled by the sub control circuit 101, but the other processes are executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, various kinds of processing related to the execution of the winning rate UP function (general medium_game start process, win rate UP function selection process, general medium_winning rate UP function selection lottery process, AT_ Only the game start process and the AT_winning rate UP function selection lottery process) will be described, and description of other various processes will be omitted.

In the execution processing example of the winning rate UP function described below, the operation period of the winning rate UP function in both the normal game and the AT game is 20 games, the non-lottery period is 10 games, and the winning rate UP period is There are 10 games.

Further, at the timing when the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs during the normal game period (specific condition that the operation of the winning rate UP function can be started), the number of remaining games of the normal game is 40 games (the value of the cycle counter is "39"). )). On the other hand, at the timing when the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is generated during the AT game (a predetermined condition under which the winning rate UP function can be activated), the number of remaining games in the AT game is 20 (the value of the number of remaining AT games is "19"). In this case, the operation period of the winning rate UP function does not extend between the normal game and the transition effect game, or between the AT game and the transition effect game.

Furthermore, in the period of the AT game, when the winning rate UP function is activated, when the winning lottery of the AT games is won, the number of winning extra AT games (lottery result) is retained for each winning game. Shall be added to. Further, when the pseudo BB game is won during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, and the pseudo BB game is executed as an interrupt process, the number of games consumed in the pseudo BB game is the winning rate UP function. It shall not be counted in the number of digesting games during the operating period. The various operating conditions of the above-mentioned winning percentage UP function are not limited to this example.

(3-1) General Medium_Game Start Time Process First, the general medium_game start time process in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. Note that the general medium_game start process of this example is also performed in S345 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 84), as in the above embodiment.

When the general medium_game start time process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1001 to S1018 in the flowchart shown in FIG. The processing of S1001 to S1018 in the general medium_game start time processing of this example is the same as the processing of S551 to S568 in the flowchart of the general medium_game start time processing of the above-described embodiment shown in FIGS. 101 and 102. Is done. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1001 to S1018 is omitted here.

After the processing of S1004 or S1018, or when the determination of S1005 or S1014 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the condition for generating the selective effect of the winning rate UP function (the condition for starting the operation of the winning rate UP function) is satisfied. (In this example, whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "39") is determined (S1019). That is, in this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game is a game that executes the selection effect of the winning rate UP function.

In S1019, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is not satisfied (NO in S1019), that is, the current game executes the selection effect of the winning rate UP function. If it is not a game, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S1021 described later.

On the other hand, in S1019, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is satisfied (YES in S1019), that is, the current game performs the selection effect of the winning rate UP function. In the case of a game to be executed, the sub CPU 102 performs a winning rate UP function selection process (S1020). In this process, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is executed, and the player can determine whether or not the winning rate UP function is activated. The details of the winning rate UP function selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 described later.

After the processing of S1020 or when the determination of S1019 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning percentage UP flag is in the on state (S1021). The winning rate UP flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is within the operating period of the winning rate UP function, and the player selects the winning rate UP function in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function. When turned on, it is turned on (“1” is set). Then, at the end of the operation of the winning rate UP function, the winning rate UP flag is turned off (“0” is set). The winning rate UP flag is stored in the sub RAM 103.

In S1021, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP flag is in the ON state (YES in S1021), that is, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game, the player wins the winning rate. When the operation of the UP function is selected, or when the current game is a game in the middle of the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs the lottery process at the time of selecting the general medium_winning rate UP function (S1022). In this process, the lottery process of various benefits is mainly performed during the operation period of the winning rate UP function. The details of the lottery process at the time of selecting the general medium_winning rate UP function will be described later with reference to FIG. 143 described later. Then, after the processing of S1022, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception time processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S1021, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP flag is not in the ON state (NO in S1021), that is, the player wins in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game. If the operation of the rate UP function is not selected or if the current game is a game within the non-operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1023 to S1031 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 141. The processing of S1023 to S1031 in the general medium_game start time processing of this example is the same as the processing of S569 to S577 in the flowchart of the general medium_game start time processing of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 101 and 102. Is done. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1023 to S1031 is omitted here.

In the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) performed in S1023 of this example, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table (see FIG. 40) when the winning rate UP function is not activated, The pseudo BB lottery process is performed. Further, in the cycle reduction related process performed in S1024 of this example, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle reduction lottery table (see FIG. 43 and FIG. 44) when the winning rate UP function is inactive, and performs the cycle reduction lottery.

Then, after the processing of S1028 or S1031 or when the determination of S1029 is NO, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start time processing of this example, and the processing is started command reception time processing (see FIG. 84) S356. Move to.

(3-2) Winning Rate UP Function Selection Process Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the winning rate UP function to be performed in S1020 in the flowchart of the general medium_game start process of this example (see FIGS. 140 and 141) The selection process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an effect image (winning rate UP function selection screen) on which the winning rate UP function can be selected on the liquid crystal screen (S1041). By this processing, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is started, and the player can determine the selection/non-selection of the operation of the winning rate UP function on the winning rate UP function selection screen.

In addition, in the winning rate UP function selection screen displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function, for example, option images of “selected” and “unselected” of the winning rate UP function are displayed. Then, the player operates various operation buttons provided on the front door 2b to select either "selected" or "unselected" of the winning rate UP function, thereby determining whether or not the winning rate UP function is activated. Selected.

However, the configuration of the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is not limited to this example, and any configuration can be applied as long as the player can select whether or not the winning rate UP function is activated. For example, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function, if the player does not perform a selection operation within a predetermined time after the winning rate UP function selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the winning rate UP is increased. One of the functions “selected” and “unselected” may be automatically selected. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the progress of the game is in a standby state from when the winning rate UP function selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen until the player performs a selection operation.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player has selected the operation of the winning rate UP function on the winning rate UP function selection screen (S1042).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1042 that the player has not selected the operation of the winning rate UP function (when S1042 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the winning rate UP function selection processing, and executes the processing. The process moves to S1021 of the general medium_game starting process (see FIGS. 140 and 141).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1042 that the player has selected the operation of the winning rate UP function (YES in S1042), the sub CPU 102 turns the winning rate UP flag on (S1043). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "20" (the number of games in the operation period of the winning rate UP function) to the winning rate UP period counter (S1044). The winning rate UP period counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games in the winning rate UP function, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. During the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the value of the winning rate UP period counter is decremented by "1" for each game. Then, after the processing of S1044, the sub CPU 102 ends the winning rate UP function selection processing, and moves the processing to S1021 of the general medium_game start processing (see FIG. 140 and FIG. 141).

(3-3) General Medium_Winning Rate UP Function Selected Lottery Processing Next, with reference to FIG. 143, in S1022 in the flowchart of the general medium_game starting processing of this example (see FIGS. 140 and 141) The general/_winning rate UP function selection lottery processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of “1” to “10” (whether or not the winning rate UP period) (S1051).

In S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not a value of “1” to “10” (in the case of NO determination in S1051), that is, the current game is a game in the no-lottery period. If there is, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described later. In this case, since the processes of S1052 to S1060 described below are not performed, various lottery processes (pseudo BB lottery process, cycle shortening lottery process, race win rate expectation data UP lottery process, etc.) related to benefits are not performed.

On the other hand, in S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (YES in S1051), that is, the current game is the winning rate UP period. In the case of the internal game, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process (S1052). The pseudo BB lottery process is performed in the same manner as the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) described in the above embodiment. However, in the pseudo BB lottery processing performed at this time, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (general, when the winning percentage UP function is selected) table when the winning percentage UP function is activated (see FIG. 134), and simulates it. Perform BB lottery processing. Therefore, in the pseudo BB lottery process in S1052, the winning probability of the pseudo BB game (privilege) is higher than that when the winning percentage UP function is not activated.

Also, if the pseudo BB lottery is won during the operation period of the winning rate UP function (the game of the general BB is won), and the pseudo BB game is executed as the interrupt process, various benefits performed in the pseudo BB game In the lottery process (pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery, push-order navigation lottery, and winning percentage after winning the race UP lottery: see FIG. 104), the lottery table when the winning percentage UP function is activated is referred to.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs cycle shortening related processing (S1053). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle reduction lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) when the winning rate UP function is activated (see FIGS. 136 and 137), and based on the “winning combination history” data, Cycle reduction lottery is performed. Therefore, in the cycle shortening lottery process of S1053, the winning probability of the shortened game (privilege) and/or the number of shortened games that can be obtained are increased as compared with those when the winning rate UP function is not activated.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “10” or more and the “race generation flag” is in the off state (S1054).

In S1054, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1054 is not satisfied (NO in S1054), the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery of the cycle reduction lottery determined in S1053 is “Ojuku point”. The number of corresponding shortened games is added (S1055).

After the processing of S1055, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win expectation random determination table (not shown) when the winning rate UP function is activated, and performs the race win expectation data up lottery (S1056). Therefore, in the race win expectation data up lottery in S1056, the winning probability of the race win expectation data up (privilege) and/or the degree of increase of the race win expectation data that can be obtained is the same as when the win rate UP function is not activated. It will increase compared to that.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery as the race win rate data (S1057). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described below.

Here, returning to the processing of S1054 again, in S1054, the sub CPU 102
, S1054, when it is determined that the determination condition of S1054 is satisfied (YES in S1054), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the lottery result (the number of shortened games) of the cycle-reduction lottery determined in S1053 from the value of the cycle counter. Set the calculation result to the value of the cycle counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than “10” (S1058).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1058 that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is not less than “10” (NO in S1058), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1058 that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than "10" (YES in S1058), the sub CPU 102 determines the surplus amount corresponding to the calculation (subtraction) result. The number of shortened games of is added to "Oyado Point" (S1059). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "10" (S1060). After the processing of S1060, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1061 described below.

After the processing of S1057 or S1060, or when the determination of S1051 or S1058 is NO, the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the winning rate UP period counter (S1061). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is “0” (S1062).

In S1062, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not “0” (NO in S1062), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_winning rate UP function selection lottery process. At the same time, the general medium_game start time processing (see FIGS. 140 and 141) is also ended.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1062 that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is “0” (YES in S1062), the sub CPU 102 turns off the winning rate UP flag (S1063). ). By this processing, the operation of the winning rate UP function in the normal game period is completed. After the processing of S1063, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_winning rate UP function selection lottery processing, and also ends the general medium_game start time processing (see FIGS. 140 and 141).

(3-4) Processing in AT_game start time Next, with reference to FIG. 144, processing in AT_game start time in this example will be described. Note that the AT_game start processing of this example is also performed in S353 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 84), as in the above embodiment.

When the AT_game start time process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1071 to S1077 in the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the processing of S1071 to S1077 in the AT_game start time processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S711 to S717 in the flowchart of the AT_game start time processing of the embodiment shown in FIG. 111. .. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1071 to S1077 is omitted here.

After the processing of S1077 or when the determination of S1073 is NO, the sub CPU 102 fulfills the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function (in this example, whether or not the value of the remaining AT game number is "19"). Moreover, it is determined whether or not the winning rate UP flag is in the off state (S1078).

In the determination processing of S1078, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game is a game that executes a selection effect of the winning percentage UP function. As described above, the number of AT games is added to the lottery (direct addition lottery). In the mode in which the number of additional AT games won in) is added to the number of remaining AT games for each winning game, the value of the number of remaining AT games is again set to “19” before the winning rate UP function currently in operation is finished. There is a case where (the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is satisfied). In this example, in consideration of this case as well, the on/off state of the winning rate UP flag is added as a determination parameter in addition to the condition for generating the selective effect of the winning rate UP function. Even if the value of the remaining AT game number becomes "19" again before the winning rate UP function currently in operation ends, in this case, the winning rate UP flag is in the ON state, so the determination in S1078 is made. The result is NO, and the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is not executed.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1078 that the determination condition of S1078 is not satisfied (NO in S1078), that is, when the current game is not the game for executing the selection effect of the winning percentage UP function, the sub CPU 102 determines that The processing of S1080 described later is performed.

On the other hand, in S1078, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1078 is satisfied (YES in S1078), that is, when the current game is a game for executing the selection effect of the winning percentage UP function, the sub CPU 102 is executed. Performs the winning rate UP function selection processing described in FIG. 142 (S1079). In this process, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is executed, and the player can determine whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function.

After the processing of S1079 or when the determination of S1078 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning percentage UP flag is in the on state (S1080).

In S1080, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning percentage UP flag is in the on state (YES in S1080), that is, in the selection effect of the winning percentage UP function executed in the current game, the player wins the winning percentage. When the operation of the UP function is selected, or when the current game is a game in the middle of the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs the lottery process during AT_winning rate UP function selection (S1081). In this process, the lottery process of various benefits is mainly performed during the operation period of the winning rate UP function. Note that details of the lottery processing during AT_winning rate UP function selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 described later. Then, after the processing of S1081, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1080 that the winning rate UP flag is not in the ON state (NO in S1080), that is, the player wins in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game. If the operation of the rate UP function is not selected or if the current game is a game within the non-operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1082 to S1086 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 144. It should be noted that the processes of S1082 to S1086 in the AT_game start process of this example are performed in the same manner as the processes of S718 to S722 in the AT_game start process flowchart of the embodiment shown in FIG. 111. .. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1082 to S1086 is omitted here.

In the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) performed in S1082 of this example, the sub CPU 102 causes the pseudo BB lottery (AT/AT preparing/race) table (FIG. 41) when the winning rate UP function is not activated. Pseudo BB lottery processing is performed by referring to (Reference). In addition, in the directly-on lottery process performed in S1083 of this example, the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP function is not activated.
The number of games to be added to the AT is randomly determined by referring to the directly-added lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in the push-order navigation random determination process performed in S1085 of this example, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation random determination table (not shown) when the winning rate UP function is not activated, and performs the push-order navigation random determination.

After the processing of S1086, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception time processing (see FIG. 84).

(3-5) AT_lottery process when winning rate UP function is selected Next, referring to FIG. 145, during AT performed in S1081 in the flowchart of AT_game start process of this example (see FIG. 144) _The lottery process when the winning rate UP function is selected will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (whether or not the winning rate UP period) (S1091).

In S1091, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not a value of "1" to "10" (when S1091 is NO determination), that is, the current game is a game within the no-lottery period. If there is, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1097 described below. In this case, since the processes of S1092 to S1096 to be described later are not performed, various lottery processes (pseudo BB lottery process, direct-on-addition lottery process, and push-order navigation lottery process) regarding benefits are not performed.

On the other hand, in S1091, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (YES in S1091), that is, the current game is the winning rate UP period. In the case of the internal game, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process (S1092). The pseudo BB lottery process is performed in the same manner as the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) described in the above embodiment. However, in the pseudo BB lottery process performed at this time, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning percentage UP function is selected) table when the winning percentage UP function is activated (see FIG. 135) and Perform BB lottery processing. Therefore, in the pseudo BB lottery process of S1092, the winning probability of the pseudo BB game (privilege) is higher than that when the winning percentage UP function is not activated.

Also, if the pseudo BB lottery is won during the operation of the winning rate UP function (the game of the BB in AT is won), and if the pseudo BB game is executed as an interrupt process, various benefits performed in the pseudo BB game In the lottery process (direct lottery and push-order navigation lottery: see FIG. 112), the lottery table when the winning rate UP function is activated is referred to.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a direct-on-lottery process (S1093). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-applied lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) when the winning rate UP function is activated (see FIG. 139), and performs the additional lottery processing for the AT game number. Therefore, the winning probability of the additional game (privilege) and/or the number of additional games that can be acquired in the directly-on-lottery processing in S1093 are increased as compared with those when the winning rate UP function is not activated. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of additional AT games) to the number of remaining AT games (S1094).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push-order navigation lottery table when the winning rate UP function (not shown) is operated, and performs the push-order navigation lottery process of the small win related to the “push-order bell” (S1095). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S1096). After the processing of S1096, the sub CPU 102 will be described later.
The processing of S1097 is performed.

After the processing of S1096 or when the determination of S1091 is NO, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the winning rate UP period counter (S1097). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is “0” (S1098).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1098 that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not “0” (NO in S1098), the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery process during AT_winning rate UP function selection. At the same time, the AT_game start process (see FIG. 144) is also completed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1098 that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is “0” (YES in S1098), the sub CPU 102 turns off the winning rate UP flag (S1099). ). By this processing, the operation of the winning rate UP function in the period of the AT game ends. After the processing of S1099, the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery processing during AT_winning rate UP function selection, and also finishes the AT_game start time processing (see FIG. 144).

In this example, various processes relating to the winning rate UP function are performed as described above, and, for example, the following effects are obtained by this function.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a high-probability state in which a lottery related to awarding is preferentially given to a player, but in such a gaming machine, a lottery (so-called mode The lottery) is performed to shift the game state to the high probability state. Therefore, the gaming state may not shift to the high probability state for a long time. In this case, the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

However, in the pachi-slot equipped with the winning rate UP function described in Modification 7, when a specific condition (a condition other than the lottery result) is established in the normal game or the AT game, the winning probability of the lottery related to the privilege and/or Whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function that increases the amount of acquirable benefits (whether or not to shift to the high-probability state) can be selected by the player's intention. Therefore, in the pachi-slot of this example, the player's interest in the winning rate UP function can be improved, and the above-mentioned problems that may occur conventionally can be solved.

In addition, during the operation of the winning rate UP function of this example, a lottery period without a benefit (a non-winning period of a privilege) is provided, so that a player's challenge spirit for selecting the winning rate UP function may be fueled. it can. Furthermore, by providing a non-lottery period of the privilege during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the player can be happy and unhappy with the winning of the "rare role" in the period (for example, in the lottery period of the non-lottery of the privilege). Players will be disappointed if they win the "Rare role" because they will miss the benefits that they should have had). Therefore, in this example, the player's interest in the winning rate UP function can be further enhanced.

In the modified example 7, an example in which the above-mentioned winning rate UP function is applied to the pachi-slot 1 having the game property such that the AT lottery is performed at the start of the transition effect game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not done. For example, the winning rate UP function of the modified example 7 described above can be applied to a pachi-slot having a playability such as AT lottery in a normal game. In this case, when the operation of the winning rate UP function is started in the normal game, lottery related to various benefits including AT lottery is not performed for a predetermined number of games (no lottery period), but after the no lottery period ends, the lottery is specified. In the lottery on various benefits including the AT lottery, it is possible to increase (increase) the winning probability of the various benefits and the amount of acquirable benefits over the period of the number of games (winning rate UP period).

Further, in the modified example 7, the example in which the lottery of all the benefits is not performed in the lottery-free period (non-winning period of the privilege) of the winning rate UP function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the winning rate UP function operates in the normal game, one or two lottery may be omitted from the pseudo BB lottery, the cycle shortening lottery, and the race win expectation data UP lottery. Further, for example, when the winning rate UP function is activated in the AT game, one or two of the pseudo BB lottery, the AT game number additional lottery, and the push-order navigation lottery may not be performed. ..

Further, in the above-described modified example 7, the example in which the lottery of the benefit is not performed in the lottery-free period (non-winning period of the privilege) of the winning rate UP function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this and in the lottery-free period. Although the lottery process is performed, for example, the lottery value (coefficient) of the lottery table used for the lottery may be set to 0, and the lottery process may be performed so that the privilege is always non-win. In addition, in the lottery period of the winning rate UP function, the lottery of the privilege may not be performed only when the internal winning combination is a part of the internal winning combinations (in other words, the lottery period of the winning rate UP function is not drawn). In, in the case where the internal winning combination is a part of the internal winning combinations (for example, a fixed winning combination), the prize may be randomly selected). Further, in the modified example 7, the case where the winning probability of the privilege and/or the amount of the privilege that can be acquired in the lottery-free period of the winning rate UP function is 0 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the lottery period of the rate UP function, the lottery process is performed such that the winning probability of the privilege and/or the amount of the privilege that can be obtained are smaller (decreased) than in the case where the winning rate UP function is not selected. May be.

Further, in the modified example 7, an example in which the generation condition of the selection effect of the winning rate UP function (the operation start condition of the winning rate UP function) is defined by the number of remaining games has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the number of digested games, the execution time of the game, the number of winnings of “miss”, the lottery, the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination, and a combination thereof, a condition for generating a winning effect UP function selection effect condition (winning rate). It may be configured to define the operation start condition of the UP function).

[Modification 8]
(1) Overview of AT Number Management Function In the above-described embodiment, when the number of remaining AT games is not greater than 0 in the AT game state, that is, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 or less and the AT game state ends, If the net additional number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the next AT game state is determined to be started (see FIG. 114).

However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the end condition of the AT game state is defined by the AT end payout number, and the number of games (the number of games) is equal to or more than a predetermined number of predetermined games before the AT game state ends. In some cases, it may be decided to start the next AT gaming state.

In the modified example 8, in the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, a configuration example in which a configuration for managing the operation period of the AT game by the net increase in the number of medals (AT number management function) is applied will be described. In this example, during the AT operation period, the difference number when the main small winning combination (“press order bell (CT bell)”) is won is cumulatively added, and the total sum of the difference numbers cumulatively added is a predetermined number (described later). The following describes an example in which the AT gaming state ends when the AT end payout number=AT end basic payout number+added AT number).

Further, in this example, an example in which the sum total of the difference numbers of medals (net increase number) is updated when the main order (“press order bell (CT bell)”) is won in the push order navigation lottery. In this example, when the pseudo BB game is won during the AT game period, the difference in the number of medals obtained during the pseudo BB game is the above-mentioned predetermined number (AT which will be described later) that triggers the end of the AT game state. The net increase in medals compared to the final payout number shall not be counted.

The AT end basic payout number determined in the AT preparation game changes according to the type of teammate character who wins the race effect. Therefore, in this example, the lower limit of the final payout number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the "AT final payout number") that defines the end trigger of the AT game operation period, that is, the minimum guarantee in one AT game operation period The net increase in the number of medals (initial net increase) also changes depending on the type of teammate character. Further, in this example, for example, in the case of winning directly on the lottery in an AT game or the like, the number of added medals (the number of additional ATs described later) is added to the AT end payout number of medals.

(2) Various lottery tables Next, in this example, refer to FIGS. 146 and 147 for an example of various lottery tables that are changed when the AT operation period management method is changed from game number management to number of medals management. And explain. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of the directly-on random determination table (AT-added number) used in the directly-on random determination process. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a kappa AT acquisition number lottery table used when determining the AT end basic payout number when the kappa wins.

In this example, the lottery table for determining the number of AT games used in the above embodiment is replaced with the lottery table for determining the number of medals to be won during the AT game period as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147. The various tables described in the above embodiment can be used as the various tables.

As shown in FIG. 146, the direct addition lottery table (AT addition number) in this example is, as shown in FIG. 146, the number of medals that can be added in the AT game for each internal winning combination or its winning history data (hereinafter referred to as “addition AT number”). ) And the lottery value are defined. In this example, the number of ATs to be added to the medal is "0" (no addition), "30", "60", "100", "150", "250", "400", "600" and " 900" is provided.

In the direct-applied lottery processing using the direct-applied lottery table (the number of AT-applied sheets) of this example, for example, when the winning history data is “miss 3 consecutive”, there is a probability of 32736/32768, and 60 medals are added. The number of ATs is won, and 250 medals with a probability of 32/32768 are added to the number of ATs. That is, also in this example, when the pseudo BB game is started during the AT game, even if the internal winning combination "miss" is consecutively won in the pseudo BB game state, the privilege of adding the number of medals acquired in the AT game is added. May be obtained. Then, the number of additional ATs won in the direct addition lottery process of this example is added to the AT end payout number of medals that define the end timing of the operation period of the AT game.

Also, in the kappa AT acquisition number lottery table of this example, as shown in FIG. 147, for each kappa sushi MAP data (“1 (squid) to “8 (ise lobster)”), the number of AT acquisitions when the kappa wins The correspondence relationship between (the number of medals obtained when the image production of eating sushi material corresponding to "Kappa" is performed) and the lottery value is defined. In this example, "30", "60", "100", "150", "400", "600" and "900" are provided as the number of AT medals to be acquired when the kappa wins. Further, in the kappa AT acquisition number lottery table, the lottery value of “LIFE up” is also defined for each kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”) as in the above embodiment.

In the lottery process using the lottery table for Kappa AT acquisition number of this example, for example, the set kappa sushi MAP data is “1” (squid), and “Kappa” eats sushi “squid”. When displayed on the display device 11, the AT acquisition number of 30 medals is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the AT acquisition number of 900 medals with a probability of 96/32768 is won. In addition, for example, when the set kappa sushi MAP data is “3” (kappa maki) and the image effect of “kappa” eating the sushi material “kappa maki” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the AT is displayed. The winning number is not won, but "LIFE UP" is always won.

Furthermore, in the lottery process using the lottery table for the number of obtained kappa ATs in this example, for example, the set kappa sushi MAP data is "8" (shrimp) and the "kappa" eats the sushi story "shrimp". When the image production is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the AT acquisition number of 150 medals is won with a probability of 27854/32768, and the AT acquisition of 400, 600 or 900 medals with a probability of 1638/32768 is won. The number will be won. That is, also in the Kappa sushi production of this example, when the "Kappa" produces the sushi material of a high-grade ingredient, it wins the AT acquisition number of a larger medal.

In this example, the total number of AT acquisition sheets acquired in the kappa sushi production is the AT end basic payout number (basic number of AT end payout number) of the medal.

(3) Various Related Processings of AT Number Management Function Next, various processing examples related to the execution of the above-described function of managing the AT game period by the net number increase of medals (AT number management function) will be specifically described. The execution process of these functions is controlled by the sub control circuit 101, but the other processes are executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, various processes related to the execution of these functions (variable setting process, AT preparation_variable setting process, race_game start time process, kappa victory time_game start time process, AT_game) Only the start processing and the AT BB_game start processing) will be described, and description of other various processing will be omitted.

(3-1) Variable Setting Process First, the variable setting process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 148. The variable setting process of this example is also performed in S341 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87), as in the above embodiment.

When the variable process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1101 to S1112 in the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the processes of S1101 to S1112 in the variable setting process of this example are performed in the same manner as the processes of S361 to S372 in the flowchart of the variable setting process of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1101 to S1112 is omitted here.

After the processing of S1108, S1110, or S1112, or when the determination in S1111 is NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes the "number of sheets directly above AT" (S1113). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the number of ATs on which medals are added.

After the processing of S1113, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting processing and moves the processing to S342 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(3-2) AT Preparing_Variable Setting Process Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the AT preparing_variable setting process performed in S1106 in the flowchart (see FIG. 148) of the variable setting process in this example will be described. ..

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparing”) (S1121).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1121 that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S1121), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting process, and the process To step S1107 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 148). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1121 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S1121), the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race victory flag" and the "race racer map". , “Race win rate map”, “race consecutive loss counter” and “AT game number counter” are cleared (S1122).

The "race victory flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the set "race winner" (race victory target (candidate)) wins the race production. When the "race winner" wins the race, , "1" is set in the "race victory flag". The "race consecutive defeat counter" is a counter that manages the number of times the set "race winner" is continuously defeated in the race effect (the number of times the AT is not won in succession). In the present embodiment, if the "race winner" loses the race performance ten times in a row (at the time of ceiling), the AT win is awarded.

Then, after the processing of S1122, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S1107 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 148).

(3-3) Processing During Race_Game Start Time Next, with reference to FIG. 150, processing during race_game start time in this example will be described. The process during race_game start in this example is also performed in S349 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87), as in the above embodiment.

When the process during race_game start of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1151 to S1162 in the flowchart shown in FIG. The processing of S1151 to S1162 in the in-race_game start processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S641 to S653 in the flowchart of the in-race_game start processing of the embodiment shown in FIG. 111. .. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1151 to S1164 is omitted here.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1164 that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (NO determination in S1164), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1167 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1164 that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (when YES is determined in S1164), the sub CPU 102 operates as shown in FIG. With reference to the directly added lottery table (AT added number), the added lottery process (directly added lottery process) is performed based on the “winning combination history” in the number of medals acquired in the AT game (S1165). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of ATs to be added) to the AT end payout number (S1166).

After the processing of S1066 or when the determination of S1164 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to the “push-order bell” (S1167). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S1168). Then, after the processing of S1168, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during race_game start of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(3-4) Kappa Victory_Game Start Processing Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the kappa victory_game start processing in this example will be described. The Kappa victory time_game start time process of this example is also performed in S670 in the AT preparation_game start time process flowchart (see FIG. 112), as in the above embodiment.

When the Kappa victory time_game start time process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1171 to S1185 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 151. Note that the processing of S1171 to S1185 in the Kappa victory time_game start time processing of this example is similar to the processing of S681 to S695 in the flowchart of the Kappa victory time_game start time processing of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 113. Done. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1171 to S1185 is omitted here.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1181 that the internal winning combination is the "group 1 combination" (YES in S1181), the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa AT acquisition number lottery table of this example shown in FIG. 147. Then, based on the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story), the number of AT acquisitions is randomly determined (S1186). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined AT acquisition number to the currently acquired AT acquisition number (S1187).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sushi item at the time of winning the AT acquisition number is any of “squid”, “salmon” and “tuna” (kappa sushi MAP data is “1”, “4” and “t”). 6”) is determined (S1188). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1188 that the sushi material is not one of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (when S1188 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1190 described below.

On the other hand, in S1188, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi item is any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (YES in S1188), the sub CPU 102 determines the value of the kappa end counter. Is subtracted by "1" (S1189).

After the processing of S1189 or when the determination of S1188 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (S1190).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1190 that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than "0" (NO in S1190), the sub CPU 102 determines the AT acquisition number after the addition operation of S1187 as the AT end basic payout number. (S1191). Then, after the processing of S1191, the sub CPU 701 ends the Kappa victory_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S675 of AT preparing_game start time processing (see FIG. 112).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1190 that the value of the kappa end counter is less than “0” (YES in S1190), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag (S1192). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “20 times” in the “BET return chance” (S1193).

By the processing of S1193, as the lottery for reviving the game for determining the AT end basic payout number determination game, which is performed at the end of the game at the time of winning the kappa_game start, the lottery can be performed by pressing the BET button 20 times (recovery of continuous hits). Become. If the rehabilitation lottery is won by pressing the BET button 20 times, the Kappa victory time_game start time process of this example is performed again.

After the processing of S1193, the sub CPU 102 ends the kappa victory time_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S675 of AT preparing_game start time processing (see FIG. 112).

Although not shown in FIG. 151, when the sushi item is “Kappa Maki” (when the Kappa Sushi MAP data is “3”) in the lottery process for obtaining the AT number in S1186, “LIFE UP” is set. Win the prize. In this case, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the kappa end counter instead of a series of processes from the process of adding the number of AT acquisitions (S1187) to the process of subtracting the kappa end counter (S1189). Done.

(3-5) Processing during AT_game start time Next, with reference to FIG. 152, processing during AT_game start time in this example will be described. The AT_game start time process of this example is also performed in S353 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87), as in the above embodiment.

When the processing during AT_game start of this example is started, first, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the AT game number counter (S1201). As a result, the number of games played in the AT game state is counted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing" (S1202). In S1202, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1202 is not satisfied (NO in S1202), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1208 described below.

On the other hand, in S1202, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1202 is satisfied (YES in S1202), that is, when the current game is the AT game start game, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning target lottery. With reference to the table (see FIG. 35), the lottery process for the race winning target (candidate) is performed (S1203). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target lottery process to “race winner” (S1204).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42) and performs the winning percentage lottery process (post-AT race winning percentage lottery process) of the race performed in the transition effect game after the AT ends. (S1205). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S1205 as race win rate data (S1206).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the AT-end basic payout number to the AT-end payout number counter (S1207). The AT end payout number counter shows a specific example of the remaining net additional payout number management means according to the present invention.

After the process of S1207 or when the determination of S1202 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described in FIG. 106 (S1208).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-applied lottery table (AT-applied number of sheets) of this example shown in FIG. 146, and performs the medal-applied lottery processing (direct-applied lottery processing) (S1209). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of ATs with additional medals) to the current AT end payout number counter (S1210).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win relating to the “push-order bell” (S1211). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S1212).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”), and whether the push order navigation lottery process has been won (S1213).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1213 that the determination condition of S1213 is not satisfied (NO in S1213), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start process of this example and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S356 of the time processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S1213, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1213 is satisfied (YES in S1213), the sub CPU 102 determines the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the AT game period (the total difference). ) Is updated (S1214). In this update process, the sub CPU 102 makes a net increase of the current number of medals by the difference number of medals (payout number-number multiplied) obtained when the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) won in the current game is won. Add to the number. The update processing of the net increase in the number of medals (sum of difference) is one specific example of the payout number counting means according to the present invention.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of medals after the renewal is greater than or equal to the AT end payout number (S1215). By the processing of S1215, it is determined whether the AT game is also continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S1215 shows the second example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S1215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the net added number of medals after the update is not equal to or more than the AT end payout number (NO in S1215), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 , The game state (current) is set to the game state (next time) (S1216). After the processing of S1216, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1215 that the net increase in the number of medals after the update is equal to or larger than the AT end payout number (when YES is determined in S1215), that is, when the AT game is finished in the current game, The CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the prescribed number of games corresponding to the AT end payout number which is the ending condition of the current AT gaming state is equal to or larger than the value of the AT game number counter (S1217).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1217 that the value of the specified game number corresponding to the AT end payout number is equal to or larger than the value of the AT game number counter (YES in S1217), the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate to 100. % (S1218).

After the processing of S1218 or when the determination of S1217 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "in race" to the gaming state (next time) (S1219). After the processing of S1219, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(3-6) AT BB_Game Start Time Processing Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the AT BB_game start time processing in this example will be described. Note that the AT BB_game start processing of this example is also performed in S355 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87), as in the above embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 108 (S1221). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game) described in FIG. 109 (S1222). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described in FIG. 110 (S1223).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-applied lottery table (AT-added sheet number) of this example shown in FIG. 146, and performs the medal-applied lottery processing (directly-applied lottery processing) (S1224). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the directly-on-lottery processing (the number of ATs on which medals are added) to the AT end payout number (S1225).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to the “push-order bell” (S1226). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S1227). Then, after the processing of S1227, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game start processing during AT in this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In this example, various related processes of the AT number management function are performed as described above. The following effects can be obtained by these functions, for example.

In the modified example 8, when the specified number of games corresponding to the AT end payout number is equal to or more than the number of games consumed during the AT game period, the race win rate is rewritten to 100% (see S1118 in FIG. 152). In other words, during the AT game period, if the player wins the main winning combination frequently (“push order bell (CT bell)”) and wins the push order navigation lottery process, the race win rate is easily rewritten to 100%. ..

As a result, it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period. As a result, even if the payout of medals occurs frequently during the T game period, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which MB (middle bonus) is won during the AT game period, and the payout of medals equal to or more than the number of medals paid out by the winning of the small winning combination related to the bell may be performed. .. Even in this case, since it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. Further, in the MB during the AT game period, a small winning combination that is unlikely to be stopped and displayed during normal operation (during non-MB) may be configured to be stop/displayable. Then, during normal operation (during non-MB), if a small winning combination that has a low probability of being stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed, a game property that makes it easy to determine the addition of the AT game number (AT payout number) may be added. ..

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 11 may display the end target game number obtained by subtracting the game number consumed in the AT game period from the specified game number. This allows the player to be notified of the conditions under which the transition to the next AT game state is determined. As a result, the interest of the game during the AT game period can be improved. It should be noted that a plurality of prescribed games may be provided according to this embodiment. The prescribed number of games may be determined for each set of AT games, or may be determined at the start of AT games. Further, the prescribed number of games may be determined according to the AT-end basic payout number.

In addition, in this example, when the transition to the next AT gaming state is determined, the player is notified of the transition to the AT gaming state through the race. However, as the gaming machine according to this example, when the transition to the next AT gaming state is decided, the next AT gaming state is started without passing through the race (after the AT gaming state ends). Good.

[Modification 9]
(1) Overview of AT Number Management Function and AT Game End Trigger Change Function In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, the number of digesting games during the operation period of the AT game is counted, and the AT game is the specific game number (AT start game number). (+Additional AT game number) A configuration in which the AT game state ends when it is exhausted, that is, a configuration in which the operation period of the AT game is managed by the digested game number (game number management) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not limited.

The AT game management may be configured such that the player can select either the AT game number management function or the AT number management function. In the above-mentioned number management, during the operation period of the AT game, the total sum (net additional number) of the difference number obtained by subtracting the multiplied number from the number of medals obtained (paid) is counted, and the net number of medals is specified. When the number of sheets is reached, the AT gaming state ends. That is, the operation period of the AT game is managed by the net number of medals.

In the modified example 9, in the pachi-slot 1 of the above-described embodiment, a configuration for managing the operation period of the AT game by the net increase in the number of medals (AT number management function) and a configuration for managing the number of exhausted games (AT game number management function). A configuration example when applied is described. In the AT number management, during the AT operation period, the difference number at the time of winning the main winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) is cumulatively added, and the total sum of the cumulative numbers thus added is a predetermined number (described later). When the AT end payout number=AT end basic payout number+added AT number) or more, the AT game state ends.

Further, in this example, an example in which the sum total of the difference numbers of medals (net increase number) is updated when the main order (“press order bell (CT bell)”) is won in the push order navigation lottery. In this example, if the pseudo BB game is won during the AT game period, the difference in the number of medals obtained during the pseudo BB game is the above-mentioned predetermined number (AT which will be described later) that triggers the end of the AT game state. The net increase in medals compared to the final payout number shall not be counted.

In addition, in the ninth modification, a configuration is adopted in which the number of AT start games is determined in the AT preparation game. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to determine the AT end basic payout number in the AT preparation game. That is, the value related to the termination trigger determined before starting the AT game may be the number of AT starting games or the number of AT ending basic payouts. The operation control of the AT game number management function and the AT number management function is executed by the sub control circuit 101.

(2) Various Related Processing of Change Function of AT Game End Trigger Next, various processing examples related to execution of the change function of AT game end trigger will be specifically described. The execution processing of the change function of the AT game end timing is controlled by the sub control circuit 101, but the other processing is executed in the same manner as the above embodiment. Therefore, here, various processes related to the execution of these functions (production content determination process, input state command reception process, AT_game start process, AT end payout number management process, and remaining AT game) Only the number management process) will be described, and description of other various processes will be omitted.

(2-1) Effect Content Determination Processing First, with reference to FIG. 154, effect content determination processing in this example will be described. The effect contents determination process of this example is also performed in S281 in the flowchart of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83), as in the above embodiment.

When the effect content determination processing of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processing of S1251 to S1267 in the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the processing of S1251 to S1267 in the effect content determination processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S291 to S307 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1251 to S1267 is omitted here.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1267 that the input state command is received (YES in S1267), the sub CPU 102 performs the input state command reception process (S1268). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data when the input state command is received, based on, for example, the information of the on-edge state/off-edge state of each operation unit included in the input state command. The details of the winning operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. Then, after the processing of S1118, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect contents determination processing, and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

(2-2) Input State Command Reception Process Next, the input state command reception process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 155.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input state command includes a display instruction of the AT end condition selection screen (S1281).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1281 that the display instruction of the AT end condition selection screen is included (YES in S1281), the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the AT end condition selection screen. (S1282). When the AT end condition selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the player can select the AT end condition using a predetermined operation unit. After the processing of S1282, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S1281 that the display instruction of the AT end condition selection screen is not included (NO in step S1281), the sub CPU 102 uses the remaining AT as the AT end condition in the input state command. It is determined whether or not an instruction to select the number of games is included (S1283).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1283 that the instruction to select the number of remaining AT games is included as the AT end condition (YES in S1283), the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is AT end payout. It is determined whether or not the number is the number of sheets (S1284).

In S1284, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is not the AT end payout number (when S1284 is NO), the sub CPU 102 receives the input state command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 154). ) Is ended, and the process proceeds to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83). If the current AT end condition is not the AT end payout number, the current AT end condition is the number of remaining AT games. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 maintains the state in which the number of remaining AT games is selected as the AT end condition.

On the other hand, in S1284, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is the AT end payout number (in the case of YES in S1284), the sub CPU 102 converts the AT end payout number into the remaining AT game number. (S1285). The processing of S1285 shows a first example of the notification game end timing conversion means according to the present invention.

In the present embodiment, the AT end payout number is converted into the remaining AT game number by dividing the AT end payout number by the conversion coefficient y (for example, “3”). Further, when converting the AT end payout number into the remaining AT game number, if there is a remainder without being divided, the decimal point or less is rounded down or rounded down.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the remaining AT game number obtained in S1285 in the remaining AT game number counter and clears the AT end payout number counter (S1286). The remaining AT game number counter shows a specific example of the remaining game number management means according to the present invention. The processing of S1286 shows the first example of the termination trigger determining means according to the present invention.
After the processing of S1286, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

In S1283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the instruction to select the remaining AT game number is not included as the AT end condition (NO in S1283), the sub CPU 102 sets the AT end payout number as the AT end condition. It is determined whether or not the instruction to select is included (S1287).

In S1287, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT end condition includes an instruction to select the AT end payout number (when S1287 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition remains in the AT game. It is determined whether it is a number (S1288).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1288 that the current AT end condition is not the remaining AT game number (NO in S1288), the sub CPU 102 determines that the input state command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 154). ) Is ended, and the process proceeds to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83). If the current AT end condition is not the number of remaining AT games, the current AT end condition is the AT end payout number. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 maintains the state in which the AT end payout number is selected as the AT end condition.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1288 that the current AT end condition is the remaining AT game number (YES in S1288), the sub CPU 102 converts the remaining AT game number into the AT end payout number. (S1289). The processing of S1289 shows a second example of the notification game end timing conversion means according to the present invention.
In the present embodiment, the remaining AT game number is converted into the AT end paid-out number by multiplying the AT end paid-out number by the conversion coefficient y (for example, “3”).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT end payout number obtained in S1189 in the AT end payout number counter and clears the remaining AT game number counter (S1290). The process of S1290 shows a second example of the termination trigger determining means according to the present invention.
After the processing of S1290, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in step S1287 that the instruction to select the AT end payout number as the AT end condition is not included (NO in step S1287), the sub CPU 102 determines the on-edge state/off-edge state of each operation unit. The effect is determined based on (S1291). After the processing of S1291, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and moves the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

(2-3) Processing during AT_game start time Next, with reference to FIG. 156, processing during AT_game start time in this example will be described. The AT_game start time process of this example is also performed in S353 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87), as in the above embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current AT end condition is the AT end payout number (S1301). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1301 that the current AT termination condition is the AT termination payout number (YES in S1301), the sub CPU 102 performs an AT termination payout number management process (S1302). Details of the AT end payout number management process will be described with reference to FIG. 157 described later. After the processing of S1302, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1301 that the current AT termination condition is not the AT termination payout number (NO in S1301), the sub CPU 102 performs the remaining AT game number management processing (S1303). The details of the remaining AT game number management process will be described with reference to FIG. 158 described later. After the processing of S1303, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(2-4) AT End Payout Number Management Processing Next, the AT end payout number management processing in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 157.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing" (S1311). In S1311, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1311 is not satisfied (NO in S1311), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1317 described below.

On the other hand, in S1311, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1311 is satisfied (YES in S1311), that is, when the current game is the AT game start game, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning target lottery. With reference to the table (see FIG. 35), the lottery process for the race winning target (candidate) is performed (S1312). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target lottery process to "race winner" (S1313).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42) and performs a winning percentage lottery process (post-AT race winning percentage lottery process) of the race performed in the transition effect game after the AT ends. (S1314). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S1314 as race win rate data (S1315).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the AT-end basic payout number to the AT-end payout number counter (S1316).

After the processing of S1316 or when the determination of S1311 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described in FIG. 106 (S1317).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-applied lottery table (see, for example, FIG. 154) and performs the medal-applied lottery process (directly-applied lottery process) (S1318). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of ATs on which medals are added) to the current AT end payout number counter (S1319).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing of the small win related to the “push-order bell” (S1320). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S1321).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”), and whether the push order navigation lottery process has been won (S1322).

In S1322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1062 is not satisfied (NO in S1322), the sub CPU 102 executes the AT end payout amount management process and the AT_game start time process of this example. Upon completion, the process proceeds to S356 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1322 that the determination condition of S1322 is satisfied (YES in S1322), the sub CPU 102 net increases the medals paid out in the AT game period from the AT end payout number counter. The number of sheets (sum of difference number) is subtracted (S1323).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the AT end payout number counter is equal to or less than "0" (S1324). By the processing of S1324, it is determined whether the AT game is also continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S1324 shows the third example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S1324, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the AT end payout number counter is not equal to or less than “0” (NO in S1324), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 The game state (current) is set to the game state (next time) (S1325). After the process of S1325, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT end payout number management process and the AT_game start time process of this example, and moves the process to S356 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1324 that the value of the AT end payout number counter is "0" or less (YES in S1324), that is, when the AT game is finished in the current game, the sub CPU 102 Sets "in race" to the game state (next time) (S1326). After the processing of S1326, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT end payout number management processing and the AT_game start time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(2-5) Remaining AT Game Number Management Process Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the remaining AT game number management process in this example will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remaining AT game number is larger than “0” (S1331).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1331 that the number of remaining AT games is not larger than "0" (NO in S1331), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1333 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1331 that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (YES in S1331), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining AT games (S1332).

After the processing of S1332 or when the determination of S1331 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is “AT preparing”. Yes (S1333). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1333 that the determination condition of S1333 is not satisfied (NO in S1333), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1338 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1333 that the determination condition of S1333 is satisfied (YES in S1333), the sub CPU 102 refers to the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 35) to determine the race winning target ( The lottery process of candidates is performed (S1334). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target lottery process to “race winner” (S1335).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42) and performs the winning percentage lottery process (post-AT race winning percentage lottery process) of the race performed in the transition effect game after AT (( S1336). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S1336 as race win rate data (S1337).

After the processing of S1337 or when the determination of S1333 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described in FIG. 106 (S1338). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly-applied lottery table (see FIG. 49), and performs the additional lottery process (directly-applied lottery process) on the number of AT games (S1339). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the directly-on random determination process (the number of additional AT games) to the number of remaining AT games (S1340).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push-order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs push-order navigation lottery processing of the small winning combination relating to the “push-order bell” (S1341). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push-order navigation lottery process to the “push-order navigation number” (S1342).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remaining AT game number is larger than “0” (S1343). By the processing of S1343, it is determined whether the AT game is also continued in the next game. Therefore, the processing of S1343 shows a fourth example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S1343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than “0” (YES in S1343), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 is in the game state ( Next time) is set to the game state (current) (S1344). After the processing of S1344, the sub CPU 102 ends the remaining AT game number management processing and the AT_game starting time processing of this example, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In S1343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not larger than “0” (NO in S1343), that is, when the AT game is finished in the current game, the sub CPU 102 is in the game state ( Next time) is set to "during race" (S1345). After the processing of S1345, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_game start time processing, and moves the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In Modification 9, the player can change the ending condition of the AT game state at any timing. As a result, the player can select the game content, and the interest of the game in the AT game state can be enhanced.

For example, if the ending condition of the AT gaming state is the AT end payout number, and if the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) is frequently determined as the internal winning combination, the AT gaming state ends. Since it is earlier, the opportunity to add the AT additional number is lost. Further, when the ending condition of the AT gaming state is the number of remaining AT games, the more frequently the main small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the more the number of medals to be acquired increases, which is a profit for the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property of predicting the winning ratio of the main small winning combination in the AT gaming state and switching the ending condition of the AT gaming state.

Further, in this example, the number of remaining games or the number of remaining payouts under the selected ending condition may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the number of remaining games or the remaining number of payouts when switching to the end condition which is not selected may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. As a result, the information useful for the player in determining whether or not to switch the end condition can be notified, and the enjoyment of the game in the AT game state can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, when converting the AT end payout number into the remaining AT game number, if the AT end payout number is not divisible by the conversion coefficient y and there is a remainder, the decimal point or less is rounded down or rounded off. .. However, in the gaming machine according to this example, the AT end condition selection screen is displayed only when the AT end payout number can be divided by the conversion coefficient y, and the AT end payout number can be converted into the remaining AT game number. Good.

Also, in the AT number management function of the modified example described above, the configuration example in which only the difference number when winning the main small combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) is counted as the net additional number of medals has been described. The invention is not limited to this, and the difference in the number of medals obtained when a small winning combination other than the main small winning combination is won may be cumulatively added to the net additional number of medals. Further, in the AT number management function of the modified example described above, an example of updating the net number of medals to be updated during the AT game period at the time of winning the push order navigation lottery of the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the net additional number of medals may be updated when the main small winning combination is won or when the main small winning combination is won.

Furthermore, in the AT number management function of the modified example described above, when the other winning combinations (including "miss") other than the main small winning combination ("Cushing bell (CT bell)") are won, the net number of medals is updated. It may be configured to. In such a configuration, for example, when the winning combination is “miss” or when the winning combination is a small winning combination in which the number of payouts is less than the number of BETs (multiplied number), it is already acquired in the process of updating the net increase in medals. It is also possible to decrease the net increase in the number of (1) (add a negative difference number to the currently acquired net increase).

Further, in the above-described modified example of the AT number management function, the example in which the operation period of the AT game is managed based on the net increase in the number of medals has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to manage the operation period of the AT game based on the total number (a value that does not deduct the multiplied number).

Further, the AT number management function of the modified example described above can also be applied to a pachi-slot equipped with an ART function in which an AT function and an RT function can occur simultaneously.

In the above-described embodiment and various modifications, for example, a lottery process (for example, an internal lottery process or the like) and a control process related to the progress of the game are performed by the main control circuit, and a lottery process (for example, an AT lottery process or the like) related to effect control. ) And an example in which the control process is performed by the sub-control circuit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, some or all of the lottery processing and various control processing performed by the sub control circuit in the above-described embodiment and various modifications may be performed by the main control circuit. Then, the instruction internal monitor (display device managed by the main control circuit) may notify the determined internal winning combination and the pressing order of the determined internal winning combination. Further, for example, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the main control circuit in the above-described embodiment and various modifications may be performed in the sub control circuit.

<Summary>
[Ability to change AT game end timing]
Conventionally, it is known that the player can select a desired effect from a plurality of types of effects provided in advance (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-187179). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-187179, when a player selects one of a plurality of effects, control for executing (outputting) the selected effect is performed.

However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-187179 merely executes the effect selected by the player, and does not change the game content.

The present invention has been made to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to select a game content.

With the gaming machine of the present invention, the player can change the ending condition of the AT gaming state at any timing. As a result, the player can select the game content, and the interest of the game in the AT game state can be enhanced.

[Next AT game determination function]
Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function has been developed. A gaming machine is known that terminates the AT when the total number of net additions (the number of payouts-the number of multiplications) of the game medium reaches a predetermined value (the number of terminations) (see, for example, JP-A-2014-155664). ).

However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-155664, when a combination of symbols relating to the payout of the game medium is frequently stopped and displayed during AT, the total number of net additions of the game medium is reduced with a small number of games. Since the predetermined value is reached, AT ends immediately. On the other hand, as a game provided with the AT function, there is a game in which lottery is performed for each game in the AT or a specific period to obtain a privilege advantageous to the player.

As a lottery for obtaining a privilege that is advantageous to the player, for example, a lottery of “adding the number of acquisitions” that increases a predetermined value defined as the end number, or a “set to start the next AT after the end of the current AT” A lottery of "additional numbers" can be mentioned. Therefore, if the AT ends promptly, the chances of obtaining a privilege that is advantageous to the player, such as "addition of the acquired number" or "addition of the number of sets", will be reduced. For this reason, the player cannot obey the frequent payout of the game medium during AT.

The present invention has been made to meet the above-mentioned demand, and an object of the present invention is to frequently pay out game media during AT which ends when the total number of net additions of game media reaches a predetermined value. Also, it is to provide a game machine capable of preventing the interest of the game from being deteriorated.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total difference) is greater than or equal to the specified number, the race win rate is rewritten to 100% (see S728 in FIG. 114). .. That is, the next AT operation is determined. As a result, it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period. As a result, even if the payout of medals occurs frequently during the AT game period, the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

[AT lottery function by number of medals]
Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function has been developed (for example, See JP-A-2014-155664). In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-155664, the lottery based on the internal winning combination is performed to determine whether to start the AT.

However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-155664 randomly determines whether or not the start of the AT is determined for each game, so the process of determining the start of the AT is simple, and the interest of the game is increased. However, there was a problem that

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the enjoyment of a game by complicating the process of determining the start of an AT. Is.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, during each cycle of the non-AT state, the number of medals paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed is determined by the bell payout number counter during the cycle. Count. Then, by referring to the race result lottery table corresponding to the value of the bell payout number counter during the cycle, whether or not the race result is won (AT win) is determined by lottery. As a result, the probability of determining the start of the AT differs depending on the number of medals paid out based on the small winning combination related to the bell. As a result, it is possible to complicate the process of determining the start of the AT and enhance the interest of the game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachi-slot (gaming machine), 2... Exterior body, 2a... Cabinet, 2b... Front door, 3L... Left reel, 3C... Middle reel, 3R... Right reel, 4... Reel display window, 11... Liquid crystal display device, 19L ... left stop button, 19C... middle stop button, 19R... right stop button, 21... medal slot, 51... hopper device, 55... main control board case, 57... sub-control board case, 71... main control board, 72... Sub control board, 91... Main control circuit, 93... Main CPU, 101... Sub control circuit, 102... Sub CPU

Claims (1)

Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means,
Variable display means configured by a plurality of display columns, based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, variable display means for variable display of the symbols required for the game,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by a player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol,
Informing means for informing information that gives an advantageous state to the player,
An informative game determination means capable of determining a transition to the informative game in which the notification by the informing means is executed;
In the operation period of the notification game, when the predetermined internal winning combination relating to the granting of the game value is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the number of net additions of the game value corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination is given. A means for counting the number of applied sheets for counting,
When the total number of the net added value of the game value counted by the number-of-added-number counting means is equal to or larger than the end number-added number of the game value that defines the termination trigger of the operation period of the information game, Information game ending means for determining the end of operation,
And a notification game number counting means for counting the number of games of the notification game,
The notification game determination means, when the total number of the net increase grant number during the operation period of the information game is equal to or more than the end grant number, the number of games counted by the notification game number counting means is less than the specified number of games. If there is, the game machine characterized by determining the transition to the notification game.

Images